Home

2014 FIAT 500/500c Owner`s Manual

1. CONTENTS ll A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS 11 Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors 1st Ignition Key Removal sess 1 PRESS e eae Bee a aa 16 Locking Doors With A Key 000 13 Opening Power Top Bomote PUNGHON Auri Key In lgnition Reminder ssseesee 13 To Lock The Doors And Liftgate 18 B SENTRY KEY LLL 13 Programming Additional Transmitters 18 Replacement Keys cse 14 Transmitter Battery Replacement 18 General Information o ooo oo ooo 15 E anii ag e E REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE IF E DOOR LOCKS za d ias GR REGE 20 EQUIPPED 2 e x IRIS RERBA 15 Power Door Locks If Equipped 22 To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate 16 M POWER WINDOWS s nnn 23 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IN Power Window Switches 23 Supplemental Restraint System SRS M LIFTGATE cceseeccherer esr eR anl 25 uir AM AL d E OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS LoL LLL 26 Advanced Front Air Bag Features 41 Lap Shoulder Belts oooocccccccc oc 29 Ht Hae penoso A O Lont Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure 34 Event Dafa Recorder ON ps sengner gaas 9 Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions 35 EU ASEO coctus esp
2. 298 Gasoline Clean Air llle 294 Gasoline Fuel o ooooooooomom ooo 293 Gasoline Reformulated o oo o oo 294 Gauges Coolant Temperature ssns sairas ooo 155 I PP TET 157 Odomeltet iussa kac a dede Be a 156 Tachometer atenen llle 157 Gear Ranges cies ea tates Pues 233 Gear Select Lever Override 338 General Information 292 General Maintenance 00000 ee eee 352 Glass Cleaning o css sra chive eh ra cia ia iaa 385 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Stand ING Walters soie segno ea Jean ads 241 Headlighis aces ce Rc aom RR ore Ra 111 A se oro CS Pure God Y Rede ee 384 PASSING egenos eer Ae ae e sa 112 OWIECDI Saco Soter erae estes rare Ut rb Ire 112 Heated Mirrors llle 93 Heated Seats llle 105 o Re see duy PS XE va 207 Hill Start ASSISts sss ae Ro dea ROC RC d ee 251 Holder CUP sede Ro eR e PER des 136 Hood Release llle 109 unu MEE g EET 11 Key oe eene esee v pem etd 11 Ignition Key Removal ooooooomoooo o 11 Immobilizer Sentry Key oooooooooooo 13 Infant Restraint oo o o 56 Information Center Vehicle 158 Instrument Cluster o o oo coco o 146 Instrument Panel and Controls 143 Instrument Panel Cover o oooooo oo o 385 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning
3. 385 Interior Appearance Care o o ooooooomo ooo 383 Interior Lighting ostira a areal aus 114 Introduction ou re RR x Read 4 Jacking Instructions 1 2 0 0 0 eee ee eee 324 Jack Location cal Ae wae dna Bae drca 320 Jack Operation sste siad mis RR RES 319 Jump Starting cesc ces ee an 332 Key In Reminder 2 2 0 00 a eeg 13 Key Replacement 2 6 llle 14 Keys a desea aid dc 11 Key Sentry Immobilizer o ooooooooo o 13 Lane Change and Turn SignalS 147 Lane Change Assist llle 113 Lap Shoulder Belts ooo lia n 29 Latches usaran ea RARE AU SCR S 82 FOO dare dri Ua S ares i fne Bea 109 Lead Free Gasoline sss mem rs 293 Leaks Elida adie ay andere we e da 82 AR colas Rr b ERU eun 278 Liftgate Sedan s zac ne ERS RERO S RES 25 Light Bulbs eI RI LEER RE CE 82 Lit iu atero Mene one ue RU dr iia 82 BID ee ca tra ee rA E Ped dores E me 47 Ant Lock s 2s ersresermmAA EE RES 154 Brake Assist Warning ooooooooooooo 256 Brake Warning o vastas pH b RS OS 153 Bulb Replacement ooooooooooomoooo 396 Engine Temperature Warning 152 BXEeEIOE secano dedos a atr a 82 OB sier bp uus alba iater dyes Her 147 High Beam spe RR mme EHE RO 112 High Beam Indicator ooooooooooooo 147 LOW Fuel eost koe REG ov E gens 147 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 151 Oil Pressure dp aa Re es Ras be ao 151 Parkea ciena iai aea eS a
4. llle Electronic Brake Control SysteM Brake Assist System Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control Electronic Stability Control ESC 253 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 158 Exit Tip 12i eve di e eder ree a 164 New Trip s caca ea apio a bio 163 Start Of Trip Procedure oce see me es 164 Tip Computer operata kara dedere RU ae hen 163 Trip Functions sos ce e me koe s 164 Emergency In Case of Hazard Warning Flasher oo o 305 E ta pi toy ars Get a a a sing ty 319 Jump Starting 6 llle 332 TOWING eed e base as Sek 340 Emission Control System Maintenance 349 Engine Ait Cleaner seinnte an cei ee ER baw aa abs Break In Recommendations Checking Oil Level d aca Gach secs ce A e Compartment crac dad ci ew Rx ea em ed as Cooling 426 INDEX IA Exhaust Gas Caution oo 78 Fails to Start es seeti ee es 225 Flooded Starting iiie nbn ne 225 Fuel Requirements s erste mataia a aes 293 Ola cv alba de aa es 353 Oil Fillet Cap decr sadapan aa dere i pe cada 355 Oil Selection 25 os 44S ade 354 OilSyntheuC cosido nx ree ege de ded 356 Overheating ciscus a e 305 HATS seis rose v E eer ende 223 Temperature Gauge lees 155 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 50 Euro Twin Clutch Transmission Fluid Type sia ey ees Se ea ee m 378 Event Data Recorder o oooo oo 55 Exhaust Gas Caution
5. Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK and re move the Key Fob from the ignition When leaving the vehicle always lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil 020236009 m dren should be warned not to touch the parking Ignition Switch Positions brake brake pedal or the shift lever 1 STOP OFF LOCK 8 AVV START Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or 2 MAR ACC ON RUN in a location accessible to children A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Continued a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 WARNING Continued Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Locking Doors With A Key You can insert the key with either side up To lock the door turn the key to the left To unlock the door turn the key to the right Refer to Body Lubrication in Main taining Your Vehicle for maintenance procedures Key In Ignition Reminder
6. Press the UP Aor DOWN V button to navigate the three sub menus Select the required sub menu and then briefly press the MENU button 172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 4 When accessing the Distance submenu briefly press the MENU button Either mi or km will appear on the display according to the previous setting Press the UP Aor DOWN V button for setting Briefly press the MENU button to return to the sub menu When accessing the Fuel Economy submenu briefly press the MENU button Either mpg km l or 1 100km will appear on the display according to the previous setting If the distance unit set is mi the fuel economy unit will be displayed in mpg If the distance unit set is km the fuel economy unit will be displayed in either km 1 or 1 100km 1 Press the UP Aor DOWN V button for setting 2 Briefly press the MENU button to return to the sub menu When accessing the Temperature submenu briefly press the MENU button Either F or C will appear on the display according to the previous setting 4 Press the UP Aor DOWN V button for setting 5 Briefly press the MENU button to return to the Tire Pressure PSI KPA sub menu When you have made the required settings briefly press the MENU button to go back to the sub menu screen or press and hold the MENU button approximately one second to go back to the
7. Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Emergency Operation In case of electrical failure the sunroof can be operated with the hex wrench that is located in the glove box There is a plug located in the rear of the sunroof opening at the center of the vehicle Removing the plug reveals a hex opening in the motor assembly of the sunroof Insert the hex wrench and turn moving the sunroof to the desired location Sun Shade If Equipped For vehicles equipped with either a power sunroof or a fixed glass roof there is a sun shade that can be open or close
8. Stored station recall Short button press for memory pre set 1 to 5 respectively BUTTON CD FUNCTIONS MODE A CD ejection Short button press 4 Previous next track play Short button press lt q or 4 CD track fast forward rewind Long button press lt q orp AV Previous next folder play for CD Short button press A or V MP3 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL IE General Information The radio offers the following functions Radio Section e o e e e PLL tuning with FM AM bands RBDS Radio Broadcast Data System Automatic manual station tuning FM Multipath detector Manual storing of 25 stations base radio and 40 stations if equipped with Satellite 15 on FM band 5 on FMA 5 on FMB 5 on FMC 10 on AM band 5 on AMA 5 on AMB 15 on Satellite Band if equipped 5 on SATA 5 on SATB 5 on SATC SPEED VOLUME function Customer selectable auto matic volume adjustment depending on the car speed Automatic Stereo Mono selection CD Section Track selection forward backward Fast forward rewind through tracks CD Display function display of track number and on mp3 discs song title artist and time elapsed since start of the track Playing Audio CD CD R and CD RW WARNING On multimedia CDs besides audio tracks there are data tracks too Playing this type of CD could cause hissing at a volume that could jeopardize road safety as well as causing d
9. The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPARO Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield and rear window periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumulations of salt waxes or road film and help reduce streaking and smearing 364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield or rear window Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield or rear window Make sure that they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid damaging the blade Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use Poor perfor mance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any of these conditions are present clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary Rear Wiper Blade Removal Installation 1 Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward this will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the liftgate gla
10. A B C Cycles A B C presets for AM FM Short repeated button press SAT if equipped MEDIA CD AUX Media Player if equipped Short repeated button press and present source selection 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN BUTTON GENERAL FUNCTIONS MODE A Mute Pause Volume activation deactivation Short button press Button Mute Pause AUDIO Audio adjustments low tones Menu activation short button press BASS high tones TREBLE left Adjustment type selection press A or V right balance BALANCE front Adjustment of values press lt q orp rear balance FADER j Information Song Artist Album Genre Play Button list Folder information if avail able in CD Media Player and Sat ellite if so equipped Toggles RBDS information in FM MENU Advanced functions adjustment Menu activation short button press Adjustment type selection press A or V Adjustment of values press lt q or Vol Vol Volume adjustment Press button volume increase Press button volume decrease A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 BUTTON RADIO FUNCTIONS MODE 4 Radio Station Search Automatic search press buttons AV e Automatic Search lt q or p long press for fast for e Manual Search ward Manual search press buttons A or V long press for fast forward 12345 Current radio station storing Long button press for memory pre set 1 to 5 respectively
11. OWNER S MANUAL VE Wi HICLES SOLD IN CANADA th respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Ch rysler Canada Inc used in substitution therefore DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Dr unken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol evels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking dont drive Rid e with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation WARNING Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle This manual may a and equipment that are ordered on this vehicle equipment described in vehicle Chrysler Group LLC rese design and specifications provements to its produc so include a description of features no longer available or were not Please disregard any features and this manual that are not on this rves the right to make changes in and or make additions to or im ts without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufac tured FIAT is a registered trademark of Fiat Group Mark
12. Shift the transmission into PARK Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position 1 2 3 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds 5 Restart the engine 6 Shift into the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required AUTOSTICK amp AutoStick is a driver interactive transmission feature providing manual shift control giving you more control of the vehicle AutoStick amp allows you to maximize en gine braking eliminate undesirable upshifts and down shifts and improve overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving and many other situations Operation When the shift lever is in the AutoStick position beside the Drive position it can be moved forward and rear ward This allows the driver to manually select the transmission gear being used Moving the shift lever A STARTING AND OPERATING 239 forward triggers a downshift and rearward an upshift The current gear is displayed in the instrument cluster NOTE In AutoStick mode the transmission
13. The suggested rotation method is the rearward cross shown in the following diagram This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional tires that must not be reversed E ES O Y E 055707139 Tire Rotation TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom mended cold tire pressure STARTING AND OPERATING 283 The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pres sure 284 STARTING AND OPERATING HN The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects or natural pre
14. 207 Air Pressure Tires ooo ooo 270 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 8 Antifreeze Engine Coolant o o o 370 A ta ai RES Vae PUR carta 399 Disposal 2 aspe e ES e Re nirus 373 Anti Lock Brake System ABS o o o o o 249 Anti Lock Warning Light lt 154 Appearance Care 4a soa a oye a ove 380 Automatic Dimming Mirror llle 90 Automatic Oil Change Indicator 404 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 209 Automatic Transaxle ooooooomo oo 11 Automatic Transmission lesen 229 Adding Fluid 5 5 nnn 379 Fluid and Filter Changes ooooooo oo 380 Fluid Change comunica etes 380 Fluid Level Check o o oooooomm o o 379 Fluid Type i e e a 401 Gear RanBes 4 van tec eda e acm RR od 233 Special Additives ad nasies t ataie 379 A INDEX 423 JANUtOSUCK aaa Bente aite de E ae S 238 battery ssa veh bb Ad da EE AU ds 357 Jump Starting isch acea cae aos 332 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 18 Belts Sat 2i e dea a o dede De s 79 Body Mechanism Lubrication 363 B Pillar Location llle 264 Brake Assist System les 250 Brake Fluid o 401 Brake Parking oooooooooooommmomo ooo 244 Br keS cree Sas bx aa a cd a 375 Brake System vie ss eta Rer ta cae Ge a a 248 Anti Lock ABS l l 249 Master C
15. AutoStick in this section for further informa tion Toggling the shift lever forward or rearward while in the AutoStick position beside the DRIVE position will manually select the transmission gear and will display the current gear in the instrument cluster as 1 2 3 etc A STARTING AND OPERATING 233 NOTE If the shift lever cannot be moved to the PARK REVERSE or NEUTRAL position when pushed for ward it is probably in the AutoStick position beside the DRIVE position In AutoStick mode the transmission gear 1 2 3 etc is displayed in the instrument cluster Move the shift lever to the right into the DRIVE D position for access to PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range NOTE After selecting any gear range wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating This is especially important when the engine is cold PARK P This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a level surface you may shift the transmission into PARK first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK otherwise the load on the tr
16. Opening the driver s door when the key is in the ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF LOCK sounds a signal to remove the key SENTRY KEYO The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unau thorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded electronic chip transponder to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only keys that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IN NOTE A key which has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle If the Vehicle Security Light is on after the key is turned to the ON RUN position it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics CAUTION e Always remove the Sentry Key from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat tended The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not com patible with some aftermarket remote starting sys tems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that have been programmed to
17. Power Outlet Fuse Location Underhood F15 Fuse 15 A Blue Cigar Lighter Front Console mn UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 CAUTION CIGAR LIGHTER IF EQUIPPED e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw WARNING power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the bat tery even more quickly Only use these intermit tently and with great caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery When the cigar lighter is in use it becomes very hot To avoid serious injury handle the cigar lighter with care Always check that the cigar lighter has turned off 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM CUPHOLDERS For rear passengers there are cupholders located on the For the driver and front passenger cupholders are lo Hoos Der cen ine Pront Cnver al e Gents cated on the floor console between the front seats T If gt LEE 9 Ay i 035135891 Rear Cupholders
18. all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion 356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE INN Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added To Engine Oil The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental addi tives Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at eve
19. mation associated with Trip A or Trip B functions will be reset 164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HE Start Of Trip Procedure With the ignition on push and hold the TRIP button for over one second to reset Exit Trip To exit the Trip function wait until all the values have been displayed or hold the MENU button for longer than one second Briefly push the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or push and hold the MENU approximately one second to go back to the main screen without storing settings Trip Functions Both trip functions are resettable reset start of new trip Trip A can be used to display the figures relating to e Range e Trip distance A e Average consumption e Instantaneous consumption e Average speed A Travel time A driving time Trip B can be used to display the figures relating to Trip distance B Average consumption e Average speed B Travel time B driving time NOTE Trip B functions may be excluded see Trip B Data Range and Instantaneous consumption can not be reset A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165 Values Displayed Range This indicates the distance which may be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank assuming that driving conditions will not change The message will appear on the display in the following cases e Distance less than 30 miles or 50 km The vehicle is parked for a long time with the
20. screen or press and hold the MENU button approxi mately one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settings NOTE Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accor dance with local laws Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel in your owner manual on your DVD for further information m POWER WINDOWS Power Window Switches There are single window controls located on the shifter bezel below the climate controls which operate the driver and passenger door windows The window con trols will operate when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN position WARNING Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and do not let children play with power windows Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a Continued 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued location accessible to children Occupants particu larly unattended children can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death NE ae Power Window Switches Auto Down The driver s door window switch has an Auto Down feature Press the window switch for approximately one a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 second release and the window will go down automati cally To cancel the Auto Down movement operate the switch in either the up or dow
21. the wheel Continued a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 311 WARNING Continued Keep TIREFIT away from open flames or heat source A loose TIREFIT kit thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle Always stow the TIREFIT kit in the place provided Failure to follow these warnings can WARNING Continued e TIREFIT Sealant solution contains latex In case of an allergic reaction or rash consult a physician immediately Keep TIREFIT out of reach of chil dren If swallowed rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of water Do not induce vomiting Consult a physician immediately result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT A Whenever You Stop To Use TIREFIT your passengers and others around you Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to come in contact with hair eyes or clothing TIRE FIT is harmful if inhaled swallowed or absorbed through the skin It causes skin eye and respira tory irritation Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin Change clothing as soon as possible if there is any contact with clothing 1 Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle s Hazard Warning flashers 2 Verify that the valve stem on the wheel with the deflated tire is in a position that is near to the ground This will allow the TIREFIT Hoses 6 and 7 to reac
22. 1 Positive Post Covered With Protective Cap front headlight assembly and the left front wheel splash 2 Negative Post shield 334 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN WARNING e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON You can be injured by moving fan blades e Remove any metal jewelry such as rings watch bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories 3 Remove the protective cover over the positive battery post To remove the cover press the locking tab and pull upward on the cover 4 If using another vehicle to jump start the battery park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF WARNING Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 335 Jump Starting Procedure 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable to the positive 4 post
23. 178 Set p Men vaciones or ge dc Roe E RH 160 142 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN Technical Specifications Ls 180 Radio Operation s sessi mesca it aeea 205 Quick Guides ceres ESSERE AnD E 181 CD Player Operation ooooooooomoo 205 General Information o ooooooooo 184 Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone Functions And Adjustments 185 a mis ace gubde is E CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE 205 Radio poi ti 192 SiriusXM Satellite Radio If Equipped 194 a RSID NI 21208 a EEEE era avons 197 B CLIMATE CONTROLS ue RE 206 CD MP3 Playeri cin carro cito 199 Manual Heating And Air Conditioning 207 Troubleshooting o ooooooooooooo 202 pa Imparte Eo Equipped 2o aa cada a e bs 209 E iPod USB MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL IF EQUIPPED ociauG4iu odensdaeeeesadacad 203 CESADO o Apa eee area ns on 2n ll STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS 204 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 1 Side Vent 2 Multifunction Lever Light Control 3 Instrument Cluster And Warning Lights 4 Windshield Wiper Washer Trip Computer 5 Central Air Vents 6 Storage Compartment Radio 7 Passenger Air Bag 8 Glove Compartment 9 Rear Defrost Button 10 Hazard Button 11 Climate Controls 12 Power Windows Control UNDERSTANDING
24. Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C system PAG compressor oil and refrigerants Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf If Equipped HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro fluorocarbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmen tal Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product with a low GWP Global Warming Potential However the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning ser vice be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C system PAG compressor oil and refrigerants A C Air Filter WARNING Do not remove the A C air filter while the blower is operating or personal injury may result The A C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet on the lower right of center console Perform the following procedure to replace the filter 1 Remove the Torx amp screw that secures the passenger side console closeout cover MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 361 072670487 072670488 Torx Screw Location Console Closeout Panel 2 Pull the console closeout cover rearward to disengage 3 Remove the two 5 5 mm screws 1 and 2 that secure the front retaining tab and remove the cover the particulate a
25. Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating posi tions Remove and store the extender when not needed a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Supplemental Restraint System SRS Air Bags This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument p
26. Can a child seat be installed in the center posi tion using the inner LATCH lower anchorages N A Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH anchorage Never share a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages use the seat belt to install a child seat in the cen ter position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 Can the rear facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat Yes The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint manufac turer also allows contact See your child re straint owner s manual for more information Locating The LATCH Anchorages The lower anchorages are round bars that are e found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback below the anchorage sym bols on the seatback They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion LATCH Anchorages 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In Locating The LATCH Anchorages rear seating position located on the back of the seat 4 7 There are tether strap anchorages behind each Tht LATCH compatible child restraint
27. Continued 156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN CAUTION Continued temperature gauge are lit pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Maintaining Your Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph 27 Odometer Trip Odometer Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC Display Area This display indicates the total distance the vehicle has been driven U S Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that y
28. Front Cupholders a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 STORAGE Glove Compartment The glove compartment is located on the right side of the instrument panel Pull outward on the glove compart ment latch to open the glove compartment Push the glove compartment door upward to close it Glove Compartment Latch 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CARGO AREA FEATURES The rear seatbacks have a fold down feature to allow increased cargo capacity Push down the release button located at the outboard top of the seatback and move the seatback to its folded down position to provide a flat load floor cargo area When returning the seatback to its upright position push rearward until the seatback is properly latched d Z 0354015374 Rear Seat Release Buttons a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 Folded Rear Seats 0354015375 REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located in the center of the instrument panel below the radio Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster An indicator in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 20 minutes To manually shut the defroster off push the button a second time NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating
29. Ibs 295 kg Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4 A STARTING AND OPERATING 267 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle The follow ing table shows examples on how to calculate total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and num ber and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 392 kg 268 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Combined weight of AVAILABLE TOTAL FRONT occupants and cargo MINUS Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Occupant 1 200 lbs Weight 865 Ibs af 195 lbs Occupant 1 210 lbs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 lbs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs minus 540 Ibs 325 lbs Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 200 lbs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 lbs 865 Ibs minus 400 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 A STARTING AND OPERATING 269 WARNING Safety WARNING Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading tire failure affect vehicle handling and dr ie Ringe Redi
30. If Equipped To set a personalized equalizer adjustment Press AUDIO button PE Use the A or V buttons to set EQ function Use or gt buttons to select EQ User Press MENU button to start adjusting equalizer On the display a seven bar graph will appear in which each bar represents a frequency Select the bar to be adjusted by using the 4 or amp buttons The selected bar will start to flash and it can be adjusted using A or V buttons To store the setting press the MENU or AUDIO buttons 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN Menu MENU Button Functions Press the MENU button briefly to activate the Menu function Use the A or V buttons to scroll through the menu functions To change the setting of the selected func tion use the or gt buttons The current status of the selected function appears on the display The functions managed by the Menu are e Speech Volume e Aux Audio Offset e Radio Off e Sat ID e SiriusXM Telephone Number e System Reset e Speed Volume e On Volume Limit Press the MENU button again to exit the Menu function Speed Volume Function If Equipped This function automatically adapts the volume level to the speed of the car turning up the volume when the speed increases to maintain the ratio with the noise level inside the passenger compartment To activate deactivate the function use the buttons The wording Speed volume appears on
31. Lights will be deactivated 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IN High Beams D With the low beams activated push the multi function lever towards the instrument panel to turn on the high beams Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel to turn off the high beams Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer ing Wheel This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on until the lever is released Parking Lights To turn on the parking lights remove the key or turn the ignition to OFF LOCK position and turn on the headlights 0 07 Daytime Running Lights If Equipped To activate the Daytime Running Lights DRL rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the O symbol NOTE The low beams and side taillights will not be on with DRL If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle was purchased the DRL function can be turned on or off using the display menus Refer to Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Turn Signals Push the multifunction lever upward to signal a right turn or downward to signal a left turn The correspond ing indicator in the instrument cluster will blink to indicate the operation of the turn signal 031410254 Turn Signal Operation NOTE The indicators will automatically turn off
32. M S or MS designation on the tire sidewall Use all season tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Summer Or Three Season Tires If Equipped Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires be aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold driving conditions For more information contact a au thorized dealer Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or mountain snowflake symbol on E the tire sidewall Use summer tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow Tires Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter Snow tires can be identified by a mountain snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall 274 STARTING AND OPERATING HN If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h For speeds above 75 mph 120 km h refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading a
33. Make sure that when the order is placed the ESN are correct If any of the ESN numbers are not entered correctly then the SiriusXM subscription will not be able to be transferred to the new radio and will not be active when installed in the customer s vehicle To reactivate 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN your service either call the number listed on the display or visit the provider online CAUTION Neither SIRIUS nor FIAT is responsible for any errors in accuracies in the SIRIUS data services or its use in vehicles SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc and its subsidiaries SiriusXM Radio requires a subscription sold separately after trial subscription included with vehicle purchase Prices and programming are provided by SiriusXM and are subject to change Subscriptions governed by Terms amp Condi tions available at sirius com service terms SiriusXM Radio U S service only available to those at least 18 years of age in the 48 contiguous United States D C amp PR Visit www sirius com Sirius Subscription Issues When Replacing A Sirius Radio When a radio needs to be replaced the dealer will need the SIRIUS information to order a new radio even if the SIRIUS subscription has lapsed The ESN number con tains 12 digits The following are instructions for retrieving the Elec tronic Serial Number ESN from FIAT 500 NAFTA model radios To retrieve the ESN
34. Option 2 Seat Back Only Memory After using the EZ entry function the seat back may first be returned upright prior to going back to the last a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 fore aft memory position on the tracks This results in the seat back memory being set only The track will then be locked forward of its last set fore aft memory posi tion To then reset the fore aft track memory feature to reestablish Memory Function Option 1 the seat has to be returned fully rearward to its last fore aft memory track position as described in Memory Function Option 1 Heated Seats If Equipped On some models the front driver and passenger seats may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks The controls for the front heated seats are located on the center instrument panel area Press the switch once to turn on the heated seats Press the switch a second time to shut the heating elements off NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes WARNING Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat suc
35. Power Door Locks s ense soli 22 Mirrors ecc e b Re P RR Erer Y 91 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 133 OSTIAS uda ara a 243 DUNTOOL a ea a eg Bae GES 130 WindOWS 435 reca 0063446446 RR Sh heres 23 Power Steering Fluid o o o o o o o 401 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 39 Preparation for Jacking ooooomoooo 323 Pretensioners Seat Belt da o aa 37 Radial Ply Tires ii sese a rss 272 Radio Operation esses a paein taa mane aen i 177 Radio Reception essaies sekan Sa eE Aa 177 Radio Sound Systems o oooooooo oo o 177 Rear Liftgate Sedan oooooomomomo mo ooo 25 Rear Window Features llle 139 432 INDEX In Recorder Event Data 00000 eee 55 Recreational Towing llle 300 Reformulated Gasoline llis 294 Retrigerant emilia cele ee rere ee ds 359 Release Hood ive REIR 109 Reminder Seat Belt llle 37 Remote Keyless Entry RKE FCC General Information less 20 Power Convertible Top Function 16 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 204 Replacement Bulbs o o o o o oo ooo 395 Replacement Keys llle 14 Replacement PartS o o o o o o o o ooo oo oo 351 Replacement Tires ooooooooooomooo o 279 Reporting Safety Defects o o o o o o 415 Restraints Child 22 22 bx IR EA res 56 Rotation Dres serrare v eG ER UR
36. STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed Unlock the doors automatically After the event occurs when the system is active the message Fuel Cutoff See Handbook is displayed Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine com partment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine System Reset Procedure After an impact causing air bag deployment the left and right turn signal lights located in the instrument panel cluster will both be blinking until the ignition is turned off In order to move your vehicle to the side of the road you must follow the system reset procedure a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 Customer Action Customer Will See 1 Turn ignition OFF Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State 2 Turn ignition ON Left Turn Light is OFF Right Turn Ligh
37. Selecting MP3 Sessions With Hybrid Discs If a hybrid disc is inserted Mixed Mode Enhanced CD Extra also containing MP3 files the radio automati cally starts playing the audio session It is possible to move to the MP3 session while playing by keeping the CD button pressed for more than two seconds A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 NOTE When the function is activated the radio may take a few seconds to start playing While checking the disc the display will show CD Reading If no MP3 files are detected the radio will resume playing the audio session from the point where it was interrupted Display Information ID3 Tag Information Display In addition to the information relating to the time elapsed folder name and file name the radio is also capable of displaying ID3 TAG information relating to Title Track Artist and Author When one of the ID3 TAG pieces of information is chosen to be displayed Title Artist Album and this informa tion has not been recorded for the track played the text UNKNOWN will be displayed for that field Selection Of Next Previous Folder Press the A button to select a next folder or the V button to select the previous folder The display will show the number of the folder The folders are selected cyclically The first folder is selected after the last folder and vice versa If no other folder track is selected in the next two seconds the first track on the new folder will be
38. Voice You can dial a phone number by pushing the VR button on the steering wheel and speaking the digits to be dialed To Call The SMS Text Sender Call directly the last SMS text sender or the sender of a message received and stored in the BLUE amp ME inbox e Conference Call You can call another contact while you are engaged in a phone conversation with Bluetooth phones supporting this option Call Waiting While engaged in a phone conversa tion you can receive notification of another incoming phone call answer the other incoming phone call and switch between two ongoing phone conversations Call waiting is only supported by a subset of compat ible mobile phones Refusing Incoming Call Or Ending A Call You can refuse an incoming call or end a current call by pushing the Phone Hang up button on the steering wheel After pairing and connecting your phone with the BLUE amp ME system you can make phone calls by speaking keywords or pushing buttons on the steering To Answer A Call You can answer an incoming call by pushing the MAIN Phone button on the steering wheel 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In wheel When using the hands free phone the audio output of a phone conversation is heard through your car sound speakers Message Reader The BLUE amp ME message reader enables automatic reading through the car sound system of the SMS texts you receive on your
39. YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 13 Storage Compartment 14 Shift Lever 15 Sport Button 16 Horn Driver Airbag 143 144 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER POP LOUNGE 500C 040335857 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER SPORT 0403001545 146 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Glow Plug Light If Equipped DO This vehicle will inhibit engine cranking when the ambient temperature is less than 22 F 30 C and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an engine block heater has not been used The Glow Plug light will flash during in cold weather for up to 10 seconds An externally powered electric engine block heater is available as optional equipment or from your authorized dealer The message Plug In Engine Heater will be displayed in the instrument cluster when the ambient temperature is below 5 F 15 C at the time the engine is shut off as a reminder to avoid possible crank delays at the next cold start 2 Rear Defrost Indicator This indicator will illuminate when the rear win dow defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 20 minutes CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use
40. YOUR VEHICLE IE have outgrown the rear facing weight or height limit of WARNING their rear facing convertible child seat Children should remain in a forward facing child seat with a harness for e Improper installation can lead to failure of an as long as possible up to the highest weight or height infant or child restraint It could come loose in a allowed by the child seat collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the child restraint manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or All children whose weight or height is above the forward facing limit for the child seat should use a belt positioning booster seat until the vehicle s seat belts fit properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt child restraint e After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle do not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attach ments Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position When the vehicle seat has been adjusted reinstall the child restraint Continued a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 WARNING Continued 2 Do the child s knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat while they
41. and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All the seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with combination lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions However in a collision the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In WARNING WARNING Continued Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your veh
42. are still sitting all the e When your child restraint is not in use secure it in way back the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor y Ss ages or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it 3 Does the shoulder belt cross the child s shoulder loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or accident it between their neck and arm could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause 4 Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible touching serious personal injury the child s thighs and not their stomach Children Too Large For Booster Seats 5 Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the seat belt in a rear seat Use this simple 5 step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle s seat belt alone 1 Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In If the answer to any of these questions was no then the WARNING child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle If the child is using the lap shoulder belt check belt fit peri Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an odically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched A arm or behind their back In a crash the shoulder belt child s squirming or slouching can mov
43. child restraint using the LATCH system WARNING buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of e Improper installation of a child restraint to the the child s reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant the child restraint installation instead of buckling it or child restraint The child could be badly injured behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex child restraint belt path and then buckle it Do not lock actly when installing an infant or child restraint the seatbelt Remind all children in the vehicle that the e Child restraint anchorages are designed to with seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with stand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted them child restraints Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts harnesses or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR retractor can be switched into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting
44. collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immedi ately and have it fixed y lt P Positioning Lap Belt 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retrac tor will withdraw any slack in the belt 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed posi tion If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must
45. display 6 Press the UP Aor DOWN V button for setting NOTE The setting will increase or decrease by one unit each time the UP Aor DOWN V button is pressed Press and hold the UP Aor DOWN V button to increase decrease the setting rapidly Save the setting by briefly pressing the button when you approach the required setting 170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or press and hold the MENU button approxi mately one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settings See Radio Repeat Audio Information With this function active the EVIC display shows infor mation relevant to the sound system e Radio tuned radio station frequency automatic tuning activation or AutoSTore e CD audio CD MP3 track number To activate On or to deactivate Off the sound system info displaying proceed as follows 1 Briefly press the MENU button Press the UP Aor Down Y button to highlight See Radio and press the MENU button 2 Press the UP Aor DOWN V button for setting 3 Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or press and hold the MENU button approxi mately one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settings If the radio has BLUE amp ME refer to the appropriate BLUE amp ME Radio Supplement for further informa tion Speed Display When this function is activated the cluster will di
46. driving gear NOTE You must press the brake pedal before shifting out of PARK Normal Starting NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal 224 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Turn the ignition switch to the AVV ACC START position and release it when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds turn the ignition switch to the STOP OFF LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Cold Weather Operation To prevent possible engine damage while starting at low temperatures this vehicle will inhibit engine cranking when the ambient temperature is less than 22 F 30 C and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an engine block heater has not been used An externally powered electric engine block heater is available as optional equipment or from your authorized dealer The message plug in engine heater will be displayed in the instrument cluster when the ambient temperature is below 5 F 15 C at the time the engine is shut off as a reminder to avoid possible crank delays at the next cold start CAUTION Use of the recommended oil and adhering to the prescribed oil change intervals is important to pre vent engine damage and ensure satisfactory starting in cold conditions Extended Park Starting NOTE Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle has not been start
47. engine running NOTE The range depends on several factors driving style type of route freeway residential mountain roads etc conditions of use of the car load tire pressure etc Trip planning must take into account the above notes Distance Traveled This value shows the distance covered since the last reset Average Consumption This value shows the approximate average consumption since the last reset Instant Consumption This indicates the fuel consumption The value is con stantly updated The message will appear on the display if the car is parked with the engine running Average Speed This value shows the vehicle s average speed as a func tion of the overall time elapsed since the last reset Travel Time This value shows the time elapsed since the last reset 166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Dimmer The EVIC display is provided with a light sensor capable of detecting environmental light conditions and adjust ing the brightness of the instruments accordingly NOTE The brightness of the instrument panel may change while travelling following an event that causes switching from day to night conditions or vice versa in the passenger compartment e g in a tunnel on avenues in shadows under bridges etc To adjust the brightness proceed as follows 1 Press the UP Aor DOWN V button to set the required bri
48. fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine NOTE If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 2 As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 3 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station A MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 351 If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whet
49. front seat belts are fastened The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle speed is over 5 mph 8 km h by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime Once the sequence starts it will continue for the entire duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened After the sequence completes the Seat Belt Reminder Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts are fastened The driver should instruct all other occu pants to fasten their seat belts If a front seat belt is 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert amp will provide both audio and visual notification The front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the front passenger seat is unoccupied BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat if equipped It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts and cargo is properly stowed BeltAlert amp can be enabled or disabled by your autho rized dealer FIAT Group Automobiles does not recom mend deactivating BeltAlert NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s or front passenger if equipped with BeltAlert seat belt remains unfastened Seat
50. hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low 272 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat ing speeds loading and
51. humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle If engine coolant anti freeze needs to be added the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also be protected against freez ing e If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at a minimum of 50 OAT coolant conforming to MS 12106 and distilled water for proper corrosion protec tion of your engine which contains aluminum compo nents Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375 Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant antifreeze performance poor gas mileage and increased emis sions Brake Sy
52. hydroplaning e The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others When you are in a severe braking condition involving the use of the ABS you will experience some pedal drop as the vehicle comes to a stop This is the result of the system reverting to the base brake system Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a pulsing sensation You may also hear a clicking noise These occurrences are normal and indicate that the system is functioning properly Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence do not pump the brakes Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated A STARTING AND OPERATING 251 WARNING The Brake Assist System BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it i
53. id den ed ace Y des nd 82 Snow Chains Tire Chains o 281 Show Tires vocera aaa Eae p 273 Spare Tife s cs a a 275 Spark Plugs cies emus x een dro od 400 Speed Control Cruise Control 120 Speedometer sy 25 eg re RR eae eR a s 157 Sport Mode ccu ue idos Ghee enn 246 STING PR m 223 Automatic Transmission 223 Cold Weather 22 autre race ROR eH 224 Engine Fails to Start o o o o o o o 225 Manual Transmission L 223 Steering Power risa n Eee Gah a d ds 243 Tit Colum secos ia puo x ey 119 Wheel THE our cr ue wd ba 119 Steering Wheel Audio Controls 204 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls 204 STOA DE conie edes sace duelo eie Dots ded ae Sea a Storage Vehicle desse Er ee ags Storing Your Vehicle llle Stuck PEeeIng vus cere o ee wae deos Sun ROO 3 92 esce eM CP Turo ee na Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 434 INDEX IA synthetic Engine Oil s ssn 024 ans mm 356 Tachometer 4 462440444 808540004082 dada aad 157 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 209 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 155 Tilt Steering Column sese 119 Tire and Loading Information Placard 264 TIREEIT zv nx iex Eabeg vue due 307 Tire Markings eee e sad m ERR EE 257 Tire8 23 wa Shae das aa d EQ 82 Aging Life of Tires 2e er 278 Air Pressure 2 e or rs Res 269 Charis susi pv ace
54. in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have a collision Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings Continued A STARTING AND OPERATING 281 TIRE CHAINS TRACTION DEVICES CAUTION Use of traction devices require sufficient tire to body clearance Follow these recommendations to guard To avoid damage 19 your vehicle or tires observe the against damage following precautions Because of restricted traction device clearance be tween tires and other suspension components it is important that only traction devices in good condi Install on Front Dres tion are used Broken devices can cause serious damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise e Due to limited clearance a 185 55R15 tire with a occurs that could indicate device breakage Remove Security Chain Company SCC Super Z6 low profile the damaged parts of the device before further use traction device or equivalent is recommended e Install device as tightly as possible and then re tighten after driving about mile 0 8 km WARNING Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h Using tires of different size and
55. information WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some Limited use spares are for emergency use only In stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit use spare wheel Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the driver s side door Replace or repair the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h for more than 30 seconds continu ously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Tread Wear Indicators Tire Spinning Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not ied 7 ibi determining when your tires should be spin your vehicle s wheels above 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping 278 STARTING AND OPERATING 055007576 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth
56. is first turned to ON RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an autho rized dealer 15 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light i Each tire including the spare if provided 1 should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when 150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation
57. is located on the right side of the engine compartment next to the battery To access the fuses press the release tabs and remove the cover 072710794 E Front Distribution Unit 392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN The ID number of the electrical component correspond ing to each fuse can be found on the back of the cover Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description F01 60 Amp Blue Body Controller F02 20 Amp Yellow Audio Amplifier F03 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Switch F04 40 Amp Orange Anti Lock Brake Pump F05 70 Amp Tan Electric Power Steering F06 20 Amp Yellow Radiator Fan Single Speed F06 30 Amp Green Radiator Fan Low Speed F07 40 Amp Orange Radiator Fan High Speed F08 40 Amp Orange Blower Motor F09 10 Amp Red Powertrain F10 10 Amp Red Horn F11 15 Amp Blue Powertrain a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 393 Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description F11 10 Amp Red Powertrain Multiair If Equipped F14 5 Amp Tan High Beam Shutter F15 15 Amp Blue Cigar Lighter F16 7 5 Amp Brown Transmission F17 25 Amp White Powertrain Multiair If Equipped F17 15 Amp Blue Powertrain F18 15 Amp Blue Powertrain F18 5 Amp Tan Powertrain Multiair If Equipped F19 7 5 Amp Brown Air Conditioning F20 15 Amp Blue Heated Seats If Equipped F21 15 Amp Blue Fuel Pump F22 20 Amp Yellow Powertrain F23 20 Amp Yellow Anti Lock Brake Valves F24 7 5
58. is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE e Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types is not recom mended and can result in cooling system damage If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency have a authorized dealer drain flush and refill with OAT coolant conforming to MS 12106 as soon as possible Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery tank The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373 WARNING The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pre
59. need it You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards e It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system Continued 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In WARNING Continued Air Bag Warning Light Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system The air bag may inflate accidentally or may 9 You will want to have the air bags ready to 2 o not function properly if modifications are made ry inflate for your protection in a collision The Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any i a a circuits and interconnecting wiring associated air bag system service If your seat including your TE with air bag system electrical components While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way including removal or loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to
60. of the booster battery BEEN 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could negative post of the booster battery result in personal injury or property damage due to 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper battery explosion cable to a good engine ground exposed metal part of the discharged vehicle s engine away from the battery CAUTION and the fuel injection system WARNING Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electri Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle Connecting The Jumper Cables cal spark could cause the battery to explode and 1 Connect the positive end of the jumper cable to the could result in personal injury Only use the specific positive post of the discharged vehicle ground point do not use any other exposed metal parts 336 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence Disconnecting The Jumper Cables L Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharge
61. other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle 1 Remove the scissors jack and tool bag from under the driver s seat 2 Remove center cap 326 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 3 Loosen but do not remove the wheel bolts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground NOTE There are front and rear jacking locations on each side of the body as indicated by the triangular lift point symbol on the sill molding Center Cap Removal NOTE Before using the swivel wrench to remove the wheel bolts be sure to remove the center cap of the wheel by inserting the angled tab end of the swivel wrench into the notched part of the center cap 060535916 Front Jacking Location WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 327 4 Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be placed under the jacking location Once the jack is positioned turn the jack screw to the right until the jack head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the wheel to be changed 060535917 Rear Jacking Location Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged 0605015399 Jack Location 328 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN WARNING WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle hur
62. outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Floor Mode e x Air comes from the floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets Bi Level Airis directed through the panel and floor outlets Press and release the Panel mode button and Floor mode button to enter Bi Level mode the indicators illuminate when ON Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode Mix Mode p Air comes from the floor defrost and side window demister outlets This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions It allows you to stay comfortable while keeping the windshield clear Defrost Mode Hy Air comes from the windshield and side window demister outlets Use Defrost mode with maxi mum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting When the defrost mode is selected the blower will automatically default to medium high NOTE While operating in the other modes the system will not automatically sense the presence of fog mist or ice on the windshield Defrost mode must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side glass Air Conditioning A C The Air Conditioning A C button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate th
63. pointed at the vehicle to activate the system 020274421 Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter With Mechanical Key Release Button 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE MH NOTE The line of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors and the liftgate The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors 1st Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information Opening Power Top Remote Function The remote keyless power top function can only be used with the engine off 0213069251 Key Fob NOTE The remote keyless power top function can be used to open the power top to the spoiler position a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 Opening Power Top Remote Function 1 OPEN Push and hold the unlock button down on the key fob for a minimum of three seconds to initiate Power Top Open The roof will stop opening when ever the unlock button on the
64. pressure in the compact spare tire 288 STARTING AND OPERATING HN 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warn ing limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still turn ON due to the low tire 3 However after driving the vehicle for up to 20 min utes above 15 mph 24 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 4 This occurs for each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Enhanced System If Equipped When the vehicle is equipped with an enhanced TPM system the driver can view text messages showing the actual tire pressure value by position by selecting the tire pressure menu command in the instrument cluster Refer to the instrument panel features sec
65. shifted out of REVERSE 031570084 Rear Wiper Operation NOTE The windshield wipers washers will only oper ate with the ignition in the ON RUN position Rear Windshield Washer Operation Push the windshield wiper washer lever toward the instrument panel to activate the rear washer Push and hold the lever for more than a half second and the wipers will activate automatically for three cycles after the lever is released TILT STEERING COLUMN IF EQUIPPED This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward The tilt control lever is located on the left side of the steering column below the turn signal controls UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 Tilt Control Lever Push down on the lever to unlock the column With one hand firmly on the steering wheel move the steering column up or down as desired Push the lever up to lock the column firmly in place 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL When engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the r
66. shown is dependant on the speed of U S mph or Metric km h units U S Speed mph Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph e If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Metric Speed kmlh Pressing the SET button once will result in a 2 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 2 km h e If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released then the new set speed will be established To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM WARNING REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED The Rear Park Assist system provides an audible indica tion of the distance between the rear fascia bumper and a detected ob
67. sion is locked in PARK Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the shift lever in PARK unless the brakes are applied To shift the transmission out of PARK the ignition switch must be turned to the ON RUN position engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed Six Speed Automatic Transmission The transmission gear position display located in the instrument cluster indicates the transmission gear range You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK Refer to Brake Transmission Shift Inter lock System in this section To drive move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position 232 STARTING AND OPERATING HN The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers Shift Lever Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears The transmission shift lever has PARK REVERSE NEU TRAL DRIVE and AutoStick shift positions Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift control refer to
68. some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag 1 Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat WARNING e Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an air bag A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rearward facing infant seat Only use a rearward facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Your vehicle has Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC or Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB and when depl
69. system when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate with the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion On the highways slow down e In city traffic while stopped place the transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition e If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and the blower control to high This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system 306 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the pointer rises to the H red mark the instrument cluster will sound a chime When safe pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle Turn off the air conditioning and
70. systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage Forward facing child restraints and some rear facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage Center Seat LATCH WARNING This vehicle does not have a center seating position Do not use the center lower LATCH anchorages to install a child seat in the center of the back seat Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu facturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here To Install A LATCH compatible Child Restraint 1 If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto matic Locking Retractor ALR seat belt stow the seat belt following the instructions below See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt to check what type of seat belt each seating position has 2 Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position For some second row seats you may need
71. the material from the vehicle or tire and wheel components Once the sealant dries it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded For optimum performance make sure the valve stem on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the TIREFIT kit You can use the TIREFIT air pump to inflate bicycle tires The kit also comes with two needles located in the Accessory Storage Compartment on the bottom of the air pump for inflating sport balls rafts or similar inflatable items However use only the Air Pump Hose 7 and make sure the Mode Select Knob 5 is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting sealant into them The TIREFIT Sealant is only in tended to seal punctures less than 14 6 mm diameter in the tread of your vehicle Do not lift or carry the TIREFIT kit by the hoses 310 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN WARNING Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle closest to traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when using the TIREFIT kit Do not use TIREFIT or drive the vehicle under the following circumstances If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately 1 4 6 mm or larger If the tire has any sidewall damage If the tire has any damage from driving with extremely low tire pressure If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat tire If the wheel has any damage If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
72. the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire and loading information label on the driver side door opening NOTE If the tire becomes over inflated press the Defla tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom mended inflation pressure before continuing 2 Disconnect the TIREFIT kit from the valve stem reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12 Volt outlet 3 Place the TIREFIT kit in its proper storage area in the vehicle 4 Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire service center 5 Replace the Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant Hose 6 assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as pos sible Refer to F Sealant Bottle and Hose Replace ment NOTE When having the tire serviced advise the autho rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed using the TIREFIT service kit F Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement 1 Uncoil the Sealant Hose 6 clear in color 2 Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the recessed area under the sealant bottle 3 Press the Sealant Bottle release button The Sealant Bottle 1 will pop up Remove the bottle and dispose of it accordingly 4 Clean any remaining sealant from the TIREFIT hous ing a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 317 5 Position the new Sealant Bottle 1 in the housing so that the Sealant Hose 6 aligns with the hose slot in the front of the housing
73. tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance a F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 419 WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause th
74. to go back to the menu screen or press and hold the button approximately one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settings Tire Pressure This function will be used to display the tire pressures individually for all four tires by location Proceed as follows 1 Briefly press the MENU button Press the UP Aor DOWN V button to highlight the Tire Pressure Press the MENU button to enter the Tire Pressure MENU 2 Press the UP or DOWN button to scroll through all four tire pressure value locations 3 Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or press and hold the button approximately one second to go back to the main screen Lock When Unlock Driver Door is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177 Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When Unlock SALES CODE RAB RADIO Drivers Door is selected you must press the RKE trans mitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger door When All Doors is selected both of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until Unlock Driver Door or AII Doors appears Exit Menu This function closes the initial menu screen Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the main screen 0415039362 Press the AA button to return to the first menu optio
75. to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle you may wish to move it to its rear most position to make room for the child seat You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat ing position a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 5 If the child restraint has a tether strap connect it to the top tether anchorage See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage for direc tions to attach a tether anchor 6 Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufac turer s instructions 7 Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direction How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints An unused belt could injure a child if they play 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor Before WARNING installing a
76. various driving conditions ESC cor rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteering or understeering condi tion Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position STARTING AND OPERATING 253 Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position ESC Off Switch Automatic Transmission 254 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING The Electronic Stability Control ESC cannot pre vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESC cannot prevent all accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning ESC also cannot prevent collisions resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappro priate driver input for the conditions Only a safe 054670029 attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents ESC O
77. wait until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H red mark for more than a minute turn the engine off immediately and call for service WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 307 TIREFIT KIT IF EQUIPPED Small punctures up to 14 6 mm in the tire tread can be sealed with TIREFIT Foreign objects e g screws or nails should not be removed from the tire TIREFIT can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately 4 F 20 C This kit will provide a temporary tire seal allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles 160 km with a maximum speed of 55 mph 90 km h TIREFIT Storage 3 060535908 The TIREFIT kit is located under the front driver s seat TIREFIT Kit Location 308 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses NS E Your TIREFIT kit is equipped with the following symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode Selecting Air Mode A Push in the Mode Select Knob 5 and turn to this position for air pump operation only Use the Black Air Pump Hose 7 when selecting this mode Selec
78. wheel bolt torque 5 After 25 miles 40 km check the wheel bolt torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are properly seated against the wheel Spare Tire Stowage Reverse instructions of the spare removal section Rotate the jack wrench tool on the winch drive nut clockwise until effort becomes heavy and an audible click is heard indicating the spare is properly stowed CAUTION The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack wrench extension tool only Use of air wrench or power tool may damage the winch JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and precautions WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 333 WARNING Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury CAUTION Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor alternator or electrical system may occur 060835932 Preparations For Jump Start Battery Posts The battery in your vehicle is located between the left
79. will only shift up or down when the driver moves the shift lever rearward or forward except as described below The transmission will automatically upshift when nec essary to prevent engine over speed e The transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows to prevent engine lugging and will display the current gear The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop After a stop the driver should manually upshift the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated You can start out from a stop in first second or third gear Starting out in second or third gear can be helpful e in snow or icy conditions To select second or third gear after the vehicle is brought to a stop tap the shift lever rearward once or twice The system will ignore shift commands that would cause engine lugging or overspeed An audible beep will sound if an inappropriate gear is requested Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is en gaged because the transmission will not shift auto matically Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when AutoStick is engaged The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a fault or overheat condition is detected To disengage AutoStick mode return the shift lever to the DRIVE position You can shift in or out of the AutoStick position at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal 240 STARTING AND OPERAT
80. your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during modify the air bag system for persons with dis the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is abilities contact your authorized dealer first turned to the ON RUN position The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight second interval The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the Body Control Module BCM fuse block inside the vehicle for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper air bag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems per formed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as THING
81. 1 3 Install the four wheel bolts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the wheel bolts WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the wheel bolts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury 4 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 5 Finish tightening the wheel bolts Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage Refer to Torque Specifications in this sec tion for correct wheel bolt torque 6 After 25 miles 40 km check the wheel bolt torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are properly seated against the wheel Vehicles Without Wheel Covers 1 Mount the road tire on the axle 2 Install the remaining wheel bolts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the wheel bolts WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury 332 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN 3 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 4 Finish tightening the wheel bolts Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage Refer to Torque Specifications in this sec tion for correct
82. 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Keep all objects a safe distance from the window UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS ll INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 143 Change Engine Oil Indicator System ll INSTRUMENT CLUSTER POP LOUNGE Trip Comp ter s seses awh eem n c CECI 144 Tp Bullae corrida 163 ll INSTRUMENT CLUSTER SPORT 145 Tip Functions 3 iod dd de 164 IN TRUMENTCEOSTER DESCRIPTIONS pa ma Values Displayed ooon nananana 165 B EEE TRONIE CTI UNE IRNAN Personal Settings Customer Programmable CENTER EVIC anuanua araa 158 5 5 Feat res c une XR ae ate We oe eS e 166 EVIC Displaysis so ea Re x e more 159 E SALES CODE RAB RADIO 177 EME OTOL DOOR quium dd to ai m Introduction 0 0 00 cee eee eevee ees 178 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC E SUg BeSLIODIS s ss aure a a RR RAE eS
83. 226 Recommended Shift Speeds Downshifting oooooooooooooomoo ll AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED y ite ERO IR da e eig s 229 Key Ignition Park Interlock 231 Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System 231 O Six Speed Automatic Transmission 231 Gear Ranges euss snae ene g a a a at ee 233 la AUTOSTICKQ 2e er oda we 238 220 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Op ration s secs o ese ee eme e 238 E DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES 240 Acceleration i 2 ies dee dre Race rs 240 Jracton 125 ess ea sede os 240 E DRIVING THROUGH WATER 241 Flowing Rising Water ooo o ooooo 241 Shallow Standing Water 241 B POWER STEERING 0 sica ir n en 243 B PARKING BRAKE oy gs cae oa bad y ERES 244 a SPORT MODE veregzak Se We e 246 Manual Transmission If Equipped 246 Automatic Transmission If Equipped 247 E BRAKE SYSTEM usais ck ER ERR Rn 248 ll ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM 249 Four Wheel Anti Lock Brake System ABS 249 Brake Assist System BAS 250 Traction Control System TCS 251 Hill Start Assist HSA o o o oo 251 Electronic Stability Control ESC 253 ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indi
84. 99 FLUID CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate 10 5 Gallons 40 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 1 4L 1 4L Turbo Engine 4 Quarts 3 8 Liters Cooling System 1 4L 1 4L Turbo Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Engine 4 6 Quarts 4 4 Liters Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula with Manual Transmission 1 4L 1 4L Turbo Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Engine 5 8 Quarts 5 5 Liters Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula with Auto matic Transmission 400 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Mn FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant 1 4L 1 4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use MOPARO Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula OAT Organic Additive Technology meeting the requirements of Chrysler Ma terial Standard MS 12106 Engine Oil 1 4L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W 30 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Ma terial Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil 1 4L Turbo Engine Use API Certified SAE 5W 40 Full Synthetic Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12991 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil Filter 1 4L 1 4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use a MOPARO Engine Oil Filter a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 401 Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuin
85. Amp Brown Stability Control System F30 15 Amp Blue Fog Lamps 394 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description F82 30 Amp Green Sunroof Convertible Top F83 20 Amp Yellow Cooling Pump If Equipped F84 10 Amp Red Transmission F85 30 Amp Green ATO Rear Defroster F87 5 Amp Tan Rear Defroster F90 5 Amp Tan Heated Mirrors If Equipped VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want to take these steps to protect your battery Disconnect the negative cable from the battery Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service e g vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 395 REPLACEMENT BULBS Interior Bulbs Bulb Number Bulb Number Overhead Lamp C5W Courtesy Lamp W5W Exterior Bulbs Bulb Number Side Direction Lamps WYS5W Rear Turn Signal Lamps PY21W Rear Side Marker Lamps W3W Rear Tail and Stop P21 5W Lamps Rear Backup Lamps W16W Center High Mounted W5W Stop Lamp License Plate Lamps LED See Authorized dealer NOTE Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased
86. BE eee 282 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 79 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle o o 82 Safety Defects Reporting ooooooooooo oo 415 Safety Exhaust G 8 ss 4 ce a ds 78 Safety Information Tires aste eec acas ka mac oo 257 Safety PS aia erante KE GUI POE eds 78 Schedule Maintenance seen 404 Seat Belt Maintenance l i 386 Seat Belt Reminder 00 00000 37 Seat Bells i us bese Ree REY wee eRe oS 79 And Pregnant Women llle 39 Child Restramt 2 2 1 ncetree creda wd cand 56 Extender 222 4 r4 kh TAS EENES Yes 38 Front Seat esae acd esu pd 29 InSp cUOft a se Be PRU EUR Beg di 79 Pretensioners 2 cita pes RERO RE RR RR 37 Rear Seat crac aaa LI 29 Untwisting Procedure o o ooooooooooo oo 34 Seat Belts Sedan soeces ereere erene kest an 26 A AA 101 A INDEX 433 Adj stment 22 44 3 bacs rem acm c s 101 Heated us dro Rer aa k ae we Powe 105 SENTRY KEYO FCC General Information 15 Sentry Key Immobilizer o oo o oooo o 13 Service Assistance ee ees 412 Service Contracte c siis da ps boe E ded 414 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction Indicator 151 Service Manuals llle 416 Shift Lever Override llle 338 Shift Speeds Manual Transmission 228 Shoulder Belts 64336603 be eae ee eee ace an 29 Side Airbag sne se ag aoe a ew e Wi ea RA DIR n 48 Signals TUI s osha ih eer
87. Bluetooth wireless technology mobile phone that are received when the phone is paired and connected to the BLUE amp ME system It does not provide access to messages that were received before the device was connected with the BLUE amp ME system The message reader will also interpret any abbreviation and emoticon contained in the SMS text NOTE Not all mobile phones support the SMS text message reader function or automatic phonebook trans fer via Bluetooth For further information on the list of compatible mobile phones go to http www fiatusa com find the SUPPORT section near the bottom of web page and click on the Bluetooth logo Message reader functions are managed by the control buttons on the steering wheel or by the BLUE amp ME voice commands The BLUE amp ME message reader enables the following operations To display an indicator on the instrument panel that indicates you have received a new SMS text It will display the sender s number name and will ask you whether to read the text of the message to you To manage the list of SMS texts received on your BLUE amp ME paired mobile phone a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 To read the messages received and stored Messages In this way while you are driving you can play your can be read multiple times favorite music collections e To call the SMS text sender using the buttons on the e iPod Player See dedicated paragraph und
88. CANC button or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RES button and release Resume can be used at any speed above 25 mph 40 km h To Vary The Speed Setting To Increase Speed When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing the RES button The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of U S mph or Metric km h units U S Speed mph e Pressing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph e If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Metric Speed kmlh e Pressing the RES button once will result in a 2 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 2 km h e If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 To Decrease Speed When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can de crease speed by pushing the SET button The speed decrement
89. DING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IN 3 Lift the hood prop rod that clips to the right side left In hot climates the prop rod may be hot Pick up the prop side when standing in front of the hood of the engine rod at the foam on the end of the prop rod compartment Place the hood prop rod in the hole of hood hinge to secure the hood in the open position WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death CAUTION To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Lower the hood until it is open 8 in 20 cm approximately and then drop it This should secure both latches Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged Hood Prop Rod a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 LIGHTS Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever located on the left side of the steering wheel controls the operation of the headlights headlight beam selection passing light and turn signals NOTE The external lights can only be turned on with the ignition in the ON RUN position Headlights E Rotate the end of the multifunction lever up ZO ward to the first detent for headlight operation 031410253 Headlight Operation NOTE When the headlights are turned on the Daytime Running
90. E Midrange adjustment 3 Press the or gt button or to increase decrease e TREBLE Treble adjustment the bass or treble adjustments Proceed as follows e BALANCE right left Balance adjustment By pressing the 4 or buttons briefly the levels will change progressively By pressing them down longer the levels will change quickly FADER front rear Balance adjustment LOUDNESS If equipped Loudness function activation deactivation e Balance Adjustment Proceed as follows e EQUALIZER If equipped activation and selection of factory equalization adjustments 1 Press AUDIO button 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN 2 Press the A or V button to set Balance in the AUDIO menu 3 Press the 4 button to increase the sound from the left speakers or the amp button to increase the sound from the right speakers By pressing the 4 or amp buttons briefly the levels will change progressively By pressing them down longer the levels will change quickly Select the value 0 to set the right and left audio outputs at the same level Fader Adjustment Proceed as follows 1 Press AUDIO button 2 Press the Aor V button to set Fader in the AUDIO menu 3 Press the 4 button to increase the sound coming from the rear speakers or the button to increase the sound coming from the front speakers By pressing the lt or buttons briefly the levels will change progres
91. E TIREFIT KIT IF EQUIPPED 307 enon use fo pisi TIREFIT Storage 2 0 cece eee 307 AS Preparations For Jacking TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation 308 Jacking Instructions TIREFIT Usage Precautions 309 Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT 311 Road Tire Installation 330 E WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE Spare lire 5towage esee e es 332 SPECIFICATIONS sou sind a 317 W JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE 332 Torque Specifications oooooooooo 317 Preparations For Jump Start 333 304 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN Jump Starting Procedure ooooooo o o 335 Automatic Transmissi0N o o ooo 341 E FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE 336 Manual Transmissi0N o o o ooooo 342 M SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE 338 M ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM 342 ll TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE 340 a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 305 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the instrument panel below the radio Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flashers When the switch is activated all direc tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers Do not use this emergency warning
92. E85 fuel usage will influence when the Change Oil or Oil Change Re quired message is displayed Severe Operating Condi tions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as early as 3 500 miles 5 600 km since last reset Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change inter vals exceed 10 000 miles 16 000 km or twelve months whichever comes first Severe Duty All Models Change Engine Oil at 4 000 miles 6 500 km if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off road environment This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty a MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 405 Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip e e e e Check engine oil level Check windshield washer fluid level Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual wear or damage Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and brake master cylinder and fill as needed Check function of all interior and exterior lights Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the maintenance sched
93. ENCIES 313 NOTE Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the tire If the sealant white fluid does not flow within 0 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose 6 1 Press the Power Button 4 to turn Off the TIREFIT kit Disconnect the Sealant Hose 6 from the valve stem Make sure the valve stem is free of debris Reconnect the Sealant Hose 6 to the valve stem Check that the Mode Select Knob 5 is in the Sealant Mode position and not Air Mode Press the Power Button 4 to turn On the TIREFIT kit Connect the Power Plug 8 to a different 12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle if available Make sure the engine is running before turning ON the TIREFIT kit The Sealant Bottle 1 may be empty due to previous use Call for assistance NOTE If the Mode Select Knob 5 is on Air Mode and the pump is operating air will dispense from the Air Pump Hose 7 only not the Sealant Hose 6 If the sealant white fluid does flow through the Sealant Hose 6 1 Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer flowing through hose typically takes 30 70 seconds As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose 6 the Pressure Gauge 3 can read as high as 70 psi 4 8 Bar The Pressure Gauge 3 will decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi 4 8 Bar to the actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle 1 is empty 2 The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi ately af
94. FF ESC OFF Indica tor Light This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con ESC 8 y OFF trol system ESC has been turned off by the driver 22 Electronic Stability Control ESC Activation Mal function Indicator Light The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator ESC Light in the instrument cluster will come on for four seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light comes on con tinuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN e Each time the ignition is turned to ON RUN the ESC system will be on even if it was turned off previously 23 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light O This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS lig
95. HN 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do notstore the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc it may be damaged e g scratched reflective coat ing removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Under certain conditions the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation CLIMATE CONTROLS The air conditioning and heating system is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather Manual Heating And Air Conditioning 045670103 Manual Temperature Control MTC The Manual Climate controls consist of a series of rotary dials and one inner push knob UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 1 Temperature Control Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment Rotating
96. ING HN WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid causing a collision or personal injury DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the front driving wheels front wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precautions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy A STARTING AND OPERATING 241 2 3 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first become visible Keep tires properly inflated Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in f
97. IPERS AND WASHERS The windshield wiper washer lever is located on the right side of the steering column NOTE The windshield wipers washers will only oper ate with the ignition in the ON RUN position Front Windshield Wiper Operation There are five different modes of operation for the front windshield wipers The windshield wiper lever can be raised or lowered to access these modes 031570041 Windshield Wiper Operation Windshield Wiper Off This is the normal position of the wiper lever Intermittent Wiper Operation Push the lever downward to the first detent The wipers will operate intermittently a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 NOTE The Intermittent function only has one detent but wiper delay will vary with changes in vehicle speed As vehicle speed increases the delay time will decrease Low Speed Push the lever downward to the second detent The wipers will operate at low speed High Speed Push the lever downward to the third detent The wipers will operate at high speed Manual High Speed Mist Push the lever upward from the off position The wipers will operate at high speed to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle This operation will continue until the lever is released When the lever is released the wipers will return to the off position and automatically shut off Front Windshield Washer Operation Pull the windshield wiper washer lever toward the steeri
98. Indicator in two submenus Fuel Econ On and Fuel Econ Off Fuel Econ On turns on a fuel economy upshift light in the instrument cluster for optimum fuel economy when operating in base driving mode Fuel Econ Off the fuel economy upshift light is disabled To set the required unit proceed as follows 1 Briefly press the MENU button to display the two sub menus 2 Press the UP Aor DOWN V button to navigate the two sub menus 3 Select the required sub menu and then briefly press the MENU button 4 Press the UP Aor DOWN V button for setting 5 Briefly press the MENU button to return to the sub menu When you have made the required settings briefly press the MENU button to go back to the sub menu screen or press and hold the MENU button approximately one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settings 176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Hill Start Assist This function is used when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill Hill Start Assist maintains the same level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the foot has been removed from the brake pedal Proceed as follows to switch this function on or off 1 Briefly press the MENU button Press the UP Aor DOWN V button to highlight the Hill Start Assist Press the MENU button to enter the Hill Start Assist MENU 2 Press the UP Aor DOWN V button for setting 3 Briefly press the MENU button
99. L and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic REVERSE R or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision e With brake pedal released verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK This range is for moving the vehicle backward Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop CAUTION NEUTRAL N Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause periods with the engine running The engine may be Severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational started in this range Apply the parking brake and shift Towing in Starting and Operating and Towing a the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information A STARTING AND OPERATING 237 DRIVE D This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through all forward gears The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris tics under all normal operating conditions When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions in hilly terrain or t
100. MISSION IF EQUIPPED CAUTION If you skip a gear while downshifting or downshift at too high of a vehicle speed these conditions may cause the engine to overspeed if too low of a gear is Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop selected and the clutch pedal is released Damage to the clutch and the transmission can result from skipping a gear while downshifting or downshifting at too high of a vehicle speed even if the clutch pedal is held pressed i e not released e Do not shift between PARK REVERSE NEU TRAL or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life shift down to second or first gear when descending a steep grade 230 STARTING AND OPERATING HN NOTE You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK WARNING WARNING Continued Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles e tis dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only sh
101. MU cie e Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in over heating and tire failure increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion TRES GENERO INFORMATION shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure e Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect ve hicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control e Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob e Safety lems You could lose control of your vehicle Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure e Economy e Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Continued 270 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING Continued Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resi
102. ND OPERATING HN to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this informa tion TPMS Warning When a system fault is detected the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will sound a chime and also display a Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System message in the EVIC for approxi mately 5 seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received 10 37 am 05 31 2012 b nana service tire pressure monitoring system 19345 mi 87 F 055874194 Service TPM System Message If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash and the Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System message will no longer display and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes A STARTING AND OPERATING 291 A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals 3 Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the
103. O OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 109 WLLIGEIS 1 40 00 De Ee A 111 Multifunction Leve oooooooooooo 111 Headlights 4 5 vss a 84 4 8 111 High Beams as poea neca b y M RR ERR 112 Flashe To Pass us e Rees 112 Parking Lights o ooooooooo oo 112 Daytime Rumning Lights If Equipped 112 AAA x Ree I RR ee te 112 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In Lane Change ASSiSt oooooooooo o 113 Follow Me Home Headlight Delay 113 Interior Lights 4e ERR tada 114 Front Fog Lights If Equipped 115 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS 116 Front Windshield Wiper Operation 116 Rear Windshield Wiper 118 E TILT STEERING COLUMN IF EQUIPPED 119 E ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL 120 Jo ACHyVdle cess ege ER Y du uu e E eg 121 To Set A Desired Speed o 121 To Deactivate seas a Dansen nae g NA ooo oo 122 To Resume Speed aer ede uw Rees 122 A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 To Vary The Speed Setting 122 Wind Bulffeting exea ee Xy ees 131 To Accelerate For Passing 123 Emergency Operation oooooooooooo 132 E REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED 124 Sun Shade If Equipped Rear Park Assist Sen
104. Pause Function Press the Xf button briefly to activate the MUTE func tion The volume will gradually decrease and the wording TUNER Mute will be shown on the display in radio mode or CD Pause in CD mode Press the amp button again to deactivate the MUTE function The volume will gradually increase until it reaches the previously set level When the volume level is changed using the dedicated controls the Mute function is deactivated and the vol ume is adjusted to the new level selected Audio Adjustment The functions that can be selected from the audio menu change depending on the context AM FM MEDIA SATELLITE Press the AUDIO button briefly to change the Audio functions After the AUDIO button is first pressed the display will show the Bass level value for the source activated at that time e g in FM mode the display will show the wording FM Bass 2 A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 Use the buttons A or V to scroll through the Menu USER EQUALIZER If equipped customized equal functions To change the setting of the selected func ization adjustment i dor P gt tion use the or buttons Tone Adjustment The current status of the selected function appears on the display 1 Press AUDIO button The functions managed by the Audio Menu are bil Mug Lr 2 Press the A or V button to select Bass Mid e BASS Bass adjustment range or Treble in the AUDIO menu MIDRANG
105. Press the bottle into the housing An audible click will be heard indicating the bottle is locked into place 6 Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose 6 and return the hose to its storage area located on the bottom of the air pump 7 Return the TIREFIT kit to its storage location in the vehicle WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Proper lug nut bolt torque is very important to ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle Any time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle the lug nuts bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated torque wrench Torque Specifications Steel Wheels Only 75 Ft Lbs 100 N m Aluminum Wheels Only Lug Nut Bolt Torque Lug Nut Lug Nut Bolt Size Bolt Socket Size 66 Ft Lbs 90 N m M12 x 125 17 mm Use only Chrysler recommended lug nuts bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles 318 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 0605005441 Wheel Mounting Surface Torque Patterns Tighten the lug nuts bolts in a star pattern until each After 25 miles 40 km check the lug nut bolt torque to be nut bolt has been tightened twice sure that all the lug nuts bolts are properly seated against the wheel a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 319 WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehic
106. RK securing the vehicle against un wanted movement When leaving the vehicle always remove the igni tion key and lock your vehicle Continued A STARTING AND OPERATING 235 WARNING Continued CAUTION Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK OFF position to the ON RUN position and also press e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be the brak dal Otherwise damage to the shift seriously or fatally injured Children should be uds un 8 lever could result DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range as this can damage the drivetrain warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the ignition key Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children A child could operate power windows other controls The following indicators should be used to ensure that or move the vehicle you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi tion e When shifting into PARK firmly move the shift lever all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully seated 236 STARTING AND OPERATING HN e Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position Do not coast in NEUTRA
107. S TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 How various systems in your vehicle were operating Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and How fast the vehicle was traveling These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per sonal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law en forcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE HI To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equip ment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times including babies and children Every state in the United States and every Canadian province requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted
108. TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System I This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the instrument cluster The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev els Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components Receiver Module Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi nate in the instrument cluster an audible chime will be activated and the Check left or right front rear tire A STARTING AND OPERATING 287 xxx x psi text message will display when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressu
109. TRAILER TOWING Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended 300 STARTING AND OPERATING HN RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Manual Transmission Automatic Transmission Flat Tow NONE Transmission in NOT ALLOWED NEUTRAL Dolly Tow Front OK OK Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED On Trailer ALL OK OK A STARTING AND OPERATING 301 CAUTION DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground This vehicle may also be towed using a tow dolly with the front wheels OFF the ground Vehicles equipped with manual transmissions may be flat towed with all four wheels on the ground at any legal highway speed for any distance if the manual transmission is in NEUTRAL automatic transmission Damage to the drivetrain will result If these vehicles require towing make sure all drive wheels are OFF the ground CAUTION Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require ments can cause severe transmission damage Dam age from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS ll HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS 305 BM JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING IF BOE VOU ENGINE OVEREBATS rcc aq EQUIP peu een gases 319
110. Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for with a clean dry towel leather upholstery e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel 384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPARQ Total Clean Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm CAUTION Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol based and or Keton based cleaning products to clean leather seats as damage to the seat may result Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the p
111. U button to store the new setting and go back to the main menu option previ ously selected Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu With Submenu 1 Briefly press the MENU button to display the first submenu option 2 Press the UP Aor DOWN V button by single presses to scroll through all the submenu options 162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN 3 Briefly press the MENU button to select the displayed submenu option and to open the relevant setup menu 4 Press the UP A or DOWN V button by single presses to select the new setting for this submenu option 5 Briefly press the MENU button to store the new setting and go back to the previously selected sub menu option 6 Press and hold the MENU button to return to the main menu short hold or the main screen longer hold Change Engine Oil Indicator System Change Engine Oil Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Change Engine Oil message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the MENU button To
112. UMENT PANEL HE The chosen mode appears on the display e Radio off 00 min The radio turns off in connec tion with the ignition key the radio is turned auto matically off as soon as the key is turned to the STOP position e Radio off 20 min The radio turns off indepen dently from the ignition key the radio remains on for a maximum period of 20 minutes after the key has been turned to the STOP position System Reset Function This function is used to restore all settings to the factory values The options are e NO No restore intervention e YES The default parameters will be restored Dur ing such operation the wording Resetting appears on the display At the end of the operation the source does not change and the previous situation will be displayed Radio Tuner Introduction When the car radio is turned on the last function that was selected before turning it off Radio CD CD MP3 AUX is activated To select the Radio function when another audio source is being listened to briefly press the TUNER button Once the Radio mode has been activated the display will show the name RBDS stations only or the frequency of the selected radio station the frequency band selected e g FMA and the preset button number e g P1 A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 Frequency Band Selection With the Radio mode active press the FM or AM tuner button briefly and repeatedly to sel
113. Use the wrench to rotate the nut counterclockwise until the spare is on the ground with enough slack in the cable to allow you to pull the tire out from under the vehicle 0605011841 Lowering Raising Spare Tire 322 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CAUTION The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack wrench tool only Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and they can dam age the winch 3 Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle Spare Tire WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 323 4 Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it Preparations For Jacking HESEBA Sus tener UH ihe WHEE 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface avoiding ice or slippery areas Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel 2 Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers 3 Set the parking brake Retainer 4 Place the shift lever in PARK automatic transmission or REVERSE manual transmission 5 Turn Off the ignition 324 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN 6 Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally WARNING Continued opposite of the jacking position For example if changing the right front Always park on a firm level surface as far from the tire block the left rear wheel edge of the roadway as possible before raisin
114. a proper restraint for the child s size 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles Child Size Height Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint facing rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle Small Children Children who are at least two years old or who have out grown the height or weight limit of their rear facing child restraint Forward Facing Child Restraint with a five point Harness facing forward in the rear seat of the vehicle Larger Children Children Too Large for Child Restraints Children who have out grown their forward facing child restraint but are too small to properly fit the vehicle s seat belt Children 12 years old or younger who have out grown the height or weight limit of their booster seat Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the ve hicle seat belt seated in the rear seat of the vehicle Vehicle Seat Belt seated in the rear seat of the vehicle a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 Infants And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limi
115. a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating ele ments Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water e Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the win dow e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window 3 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on 4 Low Fuel Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 1 0 gallon 3 8L this light will turn on and remain on until fuel is added 5 High Beam Indicator ED This light indicates that the headlights are on high beam Pull the turn signal lever toward the steer ing wheel to switch the headlights to low beam 6 Park Headlight ON Indicator Follow Me Home Headlight Delay Indicator If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on If the Follow Me Home feature is activated this indicator 0 07 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147 will illuminate and the EVIC will show how long the function remains active For further information refer to Follow Me Home in Understanding The Features of Your Vehicle 7 Turn Signal Indicator lt a gt 8 Generic Warning Light The arrow will flash in unison with the exterior turn signal when using the turn signal lever The Generic Warning Light will illuminate if any of the following condit
116. aint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required Based on the impact sensor s signals a central electronic 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE HI ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags Supplemen tal Driver Side Knee Air Bag Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB and front seat belt pretensioners as required depending on several factors including the severity and type of impact Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag are designed to provide additional protec tion by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on several factors including the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear or side collisions The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example some pole collisions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe i
117. amage to the speakers A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 CD MP3 Section e Separate bass treble tone adjustment e MP3 Info function 1D3 TAG e Right left channel balancing e Folder selection previous next e Front rear fader e Track selection forward backward Functions And Adjustments e Fast forward rewind through tracks Turning The Car Radio On rm MP3 Display function display of folder name ID3 The car radio comes on when the ON OFF button TAG information time elapsed since the start of the is pressed briefly track name of the file e When the car radio is turned on and the on volume limit e Playing audio or data CD CD R and CD RW is on the volume is limited to a setting of five even if it had been set higher when previously used Turning The Car Radio Off Press the ON OFF button to turn the radio off Audio Section Mute pause function e Soft mute function e Loudness function Graphic 7 band equalizer if equipped 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN Selecting The Radio Functions By pressing the TUNER button briefly and repeatedly the following audio sources can be selected cyclically AM FM and Satellite Bands if equipped Selecting The CD Function By briefly pressing the MEDIA button the CD audio source can be selected only if a CD is loaded Volume Adjustment To adjust the volume press the buttons Vol or Vol to increase decrease the volume Mute
118. an obstacle is detected It is recommended that the driver looks over his her shoulder when using Rear Park Assist a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 WARNING Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Rear Park Assist system Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before backing up You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surround ings Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death Continued WARNING Continued Before using the Rear Park Assist System it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the ve hicle when the vehicle is not used for towing Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the warning display turns on the single flashing arc and sounds the continuous tone Also the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly depending on its size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED WARNING The power sunroof roof switch is located in the overhead console e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access
119. and interfer jects can become trapped under the brake pedal ing with the pedals or the ability to control the and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle vehicle control e Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top If required mounting posts must be properly in of already installed floor mats Additional floor stalled if not equipped from the factory mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or pedal area and interfere with the pedals mounting can cause interference with the brake Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Always pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have control of the vehicle been removed for cleaning Continued 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks Inspect sidewalls for cuts cracks and bulges Check the wheel bolts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper cold inflation pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for po
120. anel above the glove compartment The words AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers In addition the vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column 022640267 Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations 1 Driver And Passenger Ad vanced Front Air Bags 2 Knee Bolster 3 Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Knee Bolster 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In NOTE The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags are certified to new Federal regulations for Ad vanced Air Bags The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to allow the air bags to have different inflation levels based on several factors including the severity and type of collision This vehicle may be equipped with driver and or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation level of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation level of the Advanced Front Air Bags This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a window The SABIC are located between the side windows The trim covering the SABIC
121. ansmission locking mechanism may make it diffi cult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade 234 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move ment and possible injury or damage Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not completely in PARK Check by trying to move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake pedal released Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Continued WARNING Continued Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK turn the engine OFF and remove the ignition key Once the key is removed the transmission is locked in PA
122. ark Assist Alerts If an obstacle is behind the vehicle when REVERSE gear is engaged an audible alert is activated The tones emitted by the loudspeaker inform the driver ENS that the vehicle is approaching an obstacle The pauses between the tones are directly proportional to the dis tance from the obstacle Pulses emitted in quick succes sion indicate the presence of a very close obstacle A continuous tone indicates that the obstacle is less than 12 in 30 cm away 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Audible And Visual Signals Supplied By The Rear Park Assist System SIGNAL MEANING INDICATION Obstacle Distance An obstacle is present within the sensors field of view Failure Sensor or System failures Audible signal dashboard loudspeaker e Sound pulses emitted at a rate that increases as the distance decreases Emits continuous tone at 12 in 30 cm e Adjustable volume level Refer to Menu Func tions for further information Visual Signal instrument panel Icon appears on display Message is displayed on multifunction display where provided While audible signals are emitted the audio system is not muted The audible signal is turned off immediately if the distance increases The tone cycle remains constant if the distance measured by the inner sensors is constant If this condition occurs for the external sensors the signal is turned off after 3 secon
123. as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies 13 Power Steering System Warning This light is used to manage the electrical e warning of the EPS Power Steering System Refer to Power Steering in Starting and Operating for further information 14 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light s This light informs you of a problem with the X Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the NEUTRAL position The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running imme diate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149 your vehicle may require towing The light will come on when the ignition
124. at the speed SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever 1 Turn the engine OFF 2 Firmly apply the parking brake 3 Remove the shift lever override access cover located on the right side of the shift lever housing by prying at the bottom edge of the cover Shift Lever Override Access Hole 061536004 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 339 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool into the access hole and push and hold the override release lever in Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL Reinstall the shift lever override access cover 340 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial wrecker service Towing Condition Wheels OFF The AUTOMATIC MANUAL Ground TRANSMISSION TRANSMISSION Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED If transmission is operable e Transmission in NEUTRAL e 65 mph 104 km h max speed Wheel Lift Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED Front OK OK Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 341 Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle Use only tow bars and other equipm
125. ation two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 mE X STARTING AND OPERATING 263 Tire Terminology And Definitions Term Definition B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a three hour period In flation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or kPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Vehicle manufacturer s recommended cold tire inflation pressure Pressure as sh
126. autions o oooooo o o 296 W TRAILER TOWING occcoccococcoccoo 299 Carbon Monoxide Warnings 297 MW RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND B ADDING FUEL 4 oouvirisiariidn srt 298 MO ETE 2 Sekar vee se a 900 Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap isses 298 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle 300 A STARTING AND OPERATING 223 STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both inside and outside mirrors and fasten your seat belts WARNING e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Manual Transmission If Equipped Apply the parking brake place the shift lever in NEU TRAL and press the clutch pedal before starting the vehicle This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlock ing ignition system It will not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor Automatic Transmission If Equipped The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL position before you can start the engine Depress the brake pedal before shifting to any
127. ave the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic e Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve hicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS ll SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR E WARRANTY INFORMATION 415 YOUR VEHICLE o ooooooococo o o s 412 E REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS 415 P For The Appointment 412 E DM In The 50 United States And Washington D C 415 Prepare A LiSE casi a 412 Ganada os pad a 416 Be Reasonable With Requests 412 ll PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS 416 Bl IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE 412 E DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM FIAT CUSTOMER CENTER 413 TIRE QUALITY GRADES oo 417 E FIAT CANADA CUSTOMER CENTER 413 Ol Treadwear ene xa nee ee d 418 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Traction Grades erener onre ees 418 Impaired TDD TTY 00 0 413 Temperature Grades oo o oo ooo oo 419 Service Contract Vaio sese eg wees 414 412 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE HN SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If
128. b in or near the vehicle or If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the in a location accessible to children A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake SPORT MODE parking brake released a brake system malfunction is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately failure and a collision 2L i Always fully apply the parking brake when leav Manual Transmission If Equipped ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or The Sport mode increases steering feedback to the driver injury Also be certain to leave a manual transmis with slight increases in effort and throttle pedal to engine sion in REVERSE or first 1st gear Failure to doso response This driving mode is useful while driving on may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or twisty roads where more steering precision is desired in injury spirited cornering STARTING AND OPERATING 247 1 To activate the Sport mode press the SPORT button Once activated a SPORT message will be displayed in the instrument cluster 2 Momentarily release the accelerator pedal 3 Press the accelerator pedal again to activate Automatic Transmission If Equipped The Sport mode increases steering feedback to the driver with slight increase in effort and changes the transmis sion shift schedul
129. become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer 416 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE HN To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Administra tor NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other infor mation about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans port Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1 800 333 0510 or go to http www tc gc ca roadsafety PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor mation that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintain ing servicing and repairing FIAT Group Automobiles vehicles A complete work
130. becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Refer to Replacement Tires in this section for further infor mation Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to Driving style Tire pressure e Distance driven Performance tires tires with a speed rating of V or higher and summer tires typically have a reduced tread life Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main tenance schedule is highly recommended A STARTING AND OPERATING 279 WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicator Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
131. burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately e As the air bags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for air bag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de ployed If you are involved in another collision the air bags will not be in place to protect you a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 WARNING Maintaining Your Air Bag System Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot WARNING protect you in another collision Have the air bags seat belt pretensioners and the front seat belt retrac tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im mediately Also have the Occupant Restraint Con troller ORC system serviced as well Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you
132. cator Light 256 E TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION 257 Tire Markings eee 257 Tire Identification Number TIN 261 Tire Terminology And Definitions 263 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 264 A STARTING AND OPERATING 221 E TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION 269 M TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS 282 Tite Pressure 2l er RR 269 M TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM Tire Inflation Pressures o o o o 270 EMD seri quienes sieer i Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 272 O o es Gies qd ee 286 Radial Ply Tires 272 Pahan EU EA e UU RENTRER ERE 273 PTA EN ay ete Run Flat Tires If Equipped 274 General Information Spare Tires If Equipped 275 EEE TS DENIS da ae Tire Spinning sessy kde ad vue hee ea Ys 277 M PUEL REQUIRE MEN ES ses De nO voces Gi Tread Wear Indicators llus 277 IB Castle poo ts xi Life Of Tire esses esee 278 Soo LISS nad d sardi an Replacement Tires ooooooooooooo o 279 FED NA Pael VEES a oe MMT In Gasoline 295 E TIRE CHAINS TRACTION DEVICES 2 ee ee ee ee 222 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Materials Added To Fuel 296 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 299 Fuel System C
133. ce the risk of injury in the event of a head on collision This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant s chest a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occu pants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the air bags the preten sioners are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and front passenger if equipped with front passenger BeltAlert to fasten their seat belts The feature is active whenever the ignition is on If the driver or front seat passenger is unbelted the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both
134. cessful MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ll ENGINE COMPARTMENT 1 4L 347 ll ENGINE COMPARTMENT 1 4L TURBO 348 E ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II 349 ll EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS 0 0 eee eee 349 E REPLACEMENT PARTS 351 E DEALER SERVICE 0000000 351 ll MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES 352 Engine OH ova base RE REI REOS 353 Engine OIL Filter oat eti 356 Engine Air Cleaner Filter 356 Maintenance Free Battery 357 Air Conditioner Maintenance 359 Body Lubrication Wiper Blades oooooooocooo ooo Adding Washer Fluid 366 Exhaust System so eege traat iesea mataa 366 Cooling System n oaa less 369 O Brake System o o o ooooooooooo sE 375 Manual Transmission If Equipped 378 346 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Automatic Transmission If Equipped 378 Front Turn Signal Parking And Daytime Running Appearance Care And Protection From Lamps ess iia e Ree eor ote 396 COIFOSI D co sea doe pies eed daa 380 Front Fog Lamps 00000000 397 Convertible Top Care If Equipped 386 Front Rear Side Marker Lamps 397 E FUSES eene ins peat ene tenes 388 Rear Ta
135. cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious collision Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause a collision Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires Tire Repair If your tire becomes damaged it may be repaired if it meets the following criteria e The tire has not been driven on when flat The damage is only on the tread section of your tire sidewall damage is not repairable e The puncture is no greater than 4 6 mm A STARTING AND OPERATING 273 Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information Damaged Run Flat tires or Run Flat tires that have experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description Load Index and Speed Code Tire Types All Season Tires If Equipped All Season tires provide traction for all seasons spring summer fall and winter Traction levels may vary be tween different all season tires All season tires can be identified by the M S M amp S
136. commended cold tire pressure value A STARTING AND OPERATING 285 CAUTION CAUTION Continued e The TPMS has been optimized for the original After inspecting or adjusting the tire prESSHIE equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and always reinstall the valve stem cap This will warnings have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system op eration or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size NOTE E prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni toring Sensor type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Using aftermarket tire sealants may The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire sensor to become inoperable After using an after failure or condition market tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to your an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes Continued the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure 286 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The
137. control to the desired temperature Automatic Temperature Control ATC If Equipped e The Automatic Temperature Control ATC allows the driver to select individual comfort settings The system provides set and forget operation for op timum comfort and convenience The system can be controlled manually if desired The ATC system automatically maintains the interior comfort level desired by the driver and passenger 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 045635854 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 1 AUTO Temperature Control ATC Button Controls airflow temperature distribution and air recir culation automatically Press and release to select Per forming this function will cause the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic modes Refer to Automatic Operation for more information 2 A C Button Press and release to change the current Air Conditioning A C setting Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode 3 Temperature Control Up Button Provides temperature up control Push the button for warmer temperature settings 4 Blower Control Up Button There are 12 blower speeds The blower speed increases as you press this button Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode 5 Mix Mode Air is directed through the floor defrost and side win dow demister outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that re
138. copied is often shown in very small letters or is difficult to read on the actual CD cover where it may be for example COPY CONTROL COPY PRO TECTED THIS CD CANNOT BE PLAYED ON A PC MAC The CD player is capable of reading most compression systems currently in use following the development of these systems the reading of all compression formats is not guaranteed Technical Specifications The complete system consists of o o Two 165 mm diameter midwoofer speakers one speaker in each of the front doors Two 22 mm diameter tweeter speakers one speaker in each of the front pillars Two 100 mm diameter full range speakers one speaker in each of the rear side panels Antenna on the car roof Radio with CD MPS player With Alpine Premium Audio system if equipped e Two 165 mm diameter midwoofer speakers Two 11 mm tweeter speakers in the front pillars Two 100 mm full range speakers one speaker in each of the rear side panels An amplifier in the trunk on the right hand side panel Antenna on the car roof Radio with CD MP3 player With BEATS Premium Audio system if equipped A subwoofer in the trunk on the left hand side panel aaa UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181 Quick Guide Radio Controls BUTTON GENERAL FUNCTIONS MODE O On Short button press Off Short button press TUNER AM FM SAT if equipped source Short repeated button press selection
139. correct wheel bolt torque refer to Torque Specifications in this section If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your autho rized dealership or service station 10 Disassemble the jack and tools and place them in the bag Stow it under the driver s seat and secure the bag to the floor with the straps attached to the floor of the vehicle WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided 11 Place the deflated flat tire in the cargo area Have the tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible WARNING A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immedi ately 330 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 12 Check the spare tire pressure as soon as possible Correct the tire pressure as required Road Tire Installation Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers 1 Mount the road tire on the axle 2 Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the valve stem on the wheel Install the cover by hand Do not use a hammer or excessive force to install the cover 060668307 Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap 4 Wheel Cover 5 Road Wheel 1 Valve Stem 2 Valve Notch 3 Wheel Bolt a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 33
140. d To open the sun shade press the tab and move the shade to a full open position Manual Sun Shade a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS Power is available when the ignition switch is in the ON RUN or START position Insert the cigar lighter or accessory plug into the outlet for use To preserve the heating element do not hold the lighter in the heating position CAUTION There is a standard 12 Volt 13 Amp power outlet located in the floor console for added convenience This power outlet can power mobile phones electronics and other low power devices Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watts 13 Amps power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty Power Outlet 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM WARNING To avoid serious injury or death Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle e If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure 034662413
141. d battery Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery Disconnect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the positive post of the discharged vehicle If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized dealer CAUTION Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough without engine operation the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved using a rocking motion Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between DRIVE a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 337 and REVERSE with automatic transmission or 2nd gear and REVERSE with manual transmission while gently pressing the accelerator Use the least amount of accel erator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine CAUTION Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to trans
142. d possible 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN CD Loading Ejecting To load the CD insert it gently into the slot to activate the motorized loading system which will position it cor rectly The CD can be loaded with the radio off and the ignition key turned to ON RUN In this case the radio will remain off When the radio is turned on the last source listened to before being switched off will be activated When a CD is inserted the display will show the symbol CD and the wording CD Reading They will remain displayed for the whole time required for the radio to read the CD When this time has elapsed the radio automatically starts playing the first track Press the amp button with the radio turned on to activate the motorized CD ejection system After ejec tion the last audio source listened to before playing the CD will be heard If the CD is not removed from the radio it will automati cally be reloaded about 20 seconds later but will not resume playing until the MEDIA button is pressed to select the CD mode The radio will switch to the last source prior to CD mode The CD cannot be ejected if the radio is off Possible Error Messages If the loaded CD cannot be read e g a CD ROM has been inserted or the CD is inserted the wrong way or there is a reading error the display shows the wording CD Disc error The CD will then be ejected and the audio source activated before the CD mode selec
143. d through the displayed menu and the related options or to decrease the value displayed NOTE UP AA and DOWN V buttons activate differ ent functions according to the following situations To scroll the menu options upwards or downwards To increase or decrease values during settings NOTE When opening one of the front doors the EVIC display will turn on the clock and the miles or kilometers covered for versions markets where provided for a few seconds Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Setup Menu The menu comprises a series of functions arranged in a cycle Press the UP lt A and DOWN V buttons to access the different options and settings setup The setup menu can be activated by pressing the MENU button Single presses on the UP ZXor DOWN V but tons will scroll through the setup menu options The menu includes the following functions e Speed Beep Trip B Data e Set Time A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161 e e e e e e e e e Set Date See Radio Speed Display Autoclose Units Language Buzzer Volume Button Volume Daylights D R L Hill Start Tire Pressure Unlock Driver Door First Unlock All Doors e Exit Menu Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu Without Submenu 1 Briefly press the MENU button to select the main menu option to set 2 Press the UP Aor DOWN V button by single presses to select the new setting 3 Briefly press the MEN
144. d conditions STARTING AND OPERATING 257 NOTE TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION e The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light and Tire Markings the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously ESC The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the Electronic Stability Control ESC is partiall OFF os E ned de D Laa v NO 054903773 1 U S DOT Safety Standards 4 Maximum Load Code TIN 2 Size Designation 5 Maximum Pressure 3 Service Description 6 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades 258 STARTING AND OPERATING Ha NOTE e e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Temporar
145. done under any driving condition without ever having to take your eyes off the road or remove your hands from the steering wheel as required by current laws Bluetooth wireless technology enables wireless connec tion between your mobile phone and the hands free kit installed on your car To use the hands free kit you need a Bluetooth wireless technology enabled mobile phone This hands free kit gives you the possibility of interacting vocally with your mobile phone while driving even if your mobile device does not feature this capability You can also interact with your mobile phone manually and visually using the steering wheel controls and the instrument panel multi function display 0306039361 1 Mute ESC 2 Phone Main 3 Phone Hang Up 4 Voice Recognition VR 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In To get started with BLUE amp ME hands free kit with voice recognition you have to simply pair your Bluetooth wireless technology enabled mobile phone with the system Pairing is an operation that has to be made only once NOTE e During the mobile phone pairing procedure BLUE amp ME attempts to detect a phone equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology within range and then establishes the connection using a Personal Iden tification Number PIN Once your phone is paired you have the option to transfer your mobile phone contacts to the hands free kit to make a phone ca
146. ds stopping warnings during maneuvers parallel to walls Failure Indications A malfunction of the Rear Park Assist sensors or system is indicated during REVERSE gear engagement by the instrument panel warning icon and message displayed on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC display The warning icon is illuminated and a message is displayed on the EVIC display if equipped Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information The sensors and wiring are tested continuously when the ignition is in the ON RUN position Failures are indi cated immediately if they occur when the system is ON Even if the system is able to identify that a specific sensor is in failure condition the EVIC shall indicate that the Rear Park Assist system is unavailable without reference UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 to the sensor in failure condition If even a single sensor fails the entire system must be disabled The system is turned off automatically Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths In washing stations clean sensors quickly keeping the va por jet high pressure washing nozzles at least 4 in 10 cm from the sensors Do not scratch or poke the sensors Otherwise you could damage the sensors Park Assist System Usage Preca
147. e material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 422 INDEX IN Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 371 Adding Fuel osse netter aids Ee manes 298 Adding Washer Fluid oooooooooo 366 Additives Fuel llle 296 AIDDageiscquaceseed Sabe e DE EE ee 39 Airbag Deployment oooooooooooooooomo 52 Airbag Light 54s pmi eh 2094 3 47 Airbag Maintenance llle 53 Airbag Side se seq ate ae Ps RA ES rh d 42 Airbag Window Side Curtain 43 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 356 Air Conditioner Maintenance 359 Air Conditioning 0 0 06 eee eee 207 Air Conditioning ControlS o oo oo oo 207 Air Conditioning Filter llle 360 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 359 Air Conditioning SysteM oooooooooo o
148. e Part Spark Plugs 1 4L Engine We recommend you use MOPARO Spark Plugs Spark Plugs 1 4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs Fuel Selection 1 4L 1 4L Turbo Engine 87 Octane Acceptable 91 Octane Recommended Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Manual Transmission If Equipped We recommend you use MOPAR C635 DDCT MTX Transmission Fluid Automatic Transmission If Equipped Use only MOPARO AW 1 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3 SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Convertible Top Rails We recommend you use Berulub FR 43 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS B MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE 404 Maintenance Chart 406 404 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES HN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate This means that ser vice is required for your vehicle Operating conditions such as frequent short trips trailer tow extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures and
149. e air conditioning system When in A C mode with the ATC set to a cool temperature dehumidified air flows through the air A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 outlets If Economy mode is desired press the A C button to turn off the A C mode in the ATC display and deactivate the A C system NOTE e If the system is in Mix or Defrost Mode the A C can be turned off but the A C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of the windows e If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass select Defrost mode and increase blower speed Recirculation Control When outside air contains smoke odors or high humid ity or if rapid cooling is desired you may wish to recirculate interior air by pushing the RECIRCULATION control button Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily The recirculation LED will illuminate when this button is selected Push the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode LED and allow outside air into the vehicle NOTE In cold weather use of Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The recirculation feature may be unavailable indicator light shall blink if EB conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield On systems with Manual Climate Con trols the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation Recircula tion will be disabled automatically if this mode is se lected Attempting t
150. e front fog lights see your authorized dealer Front Rear Side Marker Lamps 1 Remove portion of the wheel liner to allow hand access to side marker lamp 2 5 Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove the bulb and socket assembly from the housing Pull the bulb from the socket and insert the replace ment bulb Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place Reinstall the wheel liner Rear Tail Stop Backup And Turn Signal Lamps 1 2 Open the liftgate Remove the two screws and remove the tail lamp assembly 398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 5 Remove the backup lamp bulb by pulling straight out 6 Replace lamps as required and reinstall lamp Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL 1 Remove the two guard caps and the two fastening screws Remove the center high mounted stop lamp assembly Disconnect the electric connector Press the retaining device and open the bulb holder 073310795 a A C N Remove the snap fitted bulb to be replaced and re Tail Lamp Assembly Screws place it 3 Remove four screws and separate the backplate from the lamp housing mn Close the back cap locking it properly 4 Remove the tail stop or turn signal bulbs by pushing 7 Reinstall the two fastening screws and reinstall the them slightly and turning counter clockwise guard caps a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3
151. e standing water before driving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave effects Continued A STARTING AND OPERATING 243 CAUTION Continued POWER STEERING Driving through standing water may cause damage The electric power steering system will give you good to your vehicle s drivetrain components Always vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil trans 1 tight spaces The system will vary its assist to provide mission axle etc for signs of contamination i e light efforts while parking and good feel while driving If fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after the electric steering system experiences a fault that driving through standing water Do not continue to prevents it from providing assist you will still have the operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami bility to steer the vehicle manually nated as this may result in further damage Such WARNING damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Continued operation with reduced or no power steer Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it
152. e the belt out of will not protect a child properly which may result in position If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck serious injury or death A child must always wear move the child closer to the center of the vehicle or use both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly correctly a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints Use any attachment method shown with an X Below Child Restraint 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Combined LATCH Weight of the LATCH R T estraint Type Child Child Lower Anchors Seat Belt Only Lower Anchors Seat Belt x Restraint Onl Top Tether Tether Anchor nly Anchor Rear Facing Up to 65 lbs X X Child Restraint 29 5 kg Rear Facing More than X Child Restraint 65 lbs 29 5 kg Forward Facing Up to 65 Ibs X X Child Restraint 29 5 kg Forward Facing More than X 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children LATCH Restraint System Anchor Tether We LATCH The next generation of child safety 022668173 Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor age system called LATCH which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH equipped child seats There are
153. e tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Full Size Spare If Equipped The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not This spare tire may have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel This label contains the driving limitations for this spare This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity A STARTING AND OPERATING 277 WARNING Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further
154. eating position Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage 1 Look behind the seating position where you plan to install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchorage If there is no top tether anchorage for that seating position move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available 2 Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints raise the head restraint and where possible route the tether strap under the head restraint and 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In between the two posts If not possible lower the head 4 Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard restraint manufacturer s instructions side of the head restraint 3 Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to aaah the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap e If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat make sure the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as
155. ece nee 277 Trip Odome tere tred uang E h eee 156 Turn Signals 552 s o 112 UCIConnector esee 203 Uniform Tire Quality Grades o o o o o oo 417 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector Unleaded Gasoline Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 34 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 7 Vehicle Loading can eR 265 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 8 Vehicle Storage e ss pucr Rog dora es 217 Wait to Start Light oooooooommooo E 146 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 146 Warnings and Cautions o o o o o ooo oo o oo 7 Warranty Information ooooooooooooo o 4 Washer Adding Fluid eere emen 366 Washers Windshield 116 Washi g Vehicle i244 seo E RR 381 Water Driving Through RR Res 241 Wheel and Wheel Trim sisca enie asi ren iea 382 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 382 436 INDEX IN Wind Buftetinigi ss ie ew weed or eg cs 25 Window Fogging eee 216 WINdOWS c bebo doe eed do PEE SOR CE hes 23 lum PT 23 Windshield Defroster o ooooooo o 80 Windshield Washers llle 116 Windshield Wiper Blades o o oo o o o 363 Windshield Wipers ooooooommoomo o o ooo 116 Wiper Blade Replacement 0 0 363 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicles electronic sys
156. ect the desired recep tion band Each time the button is pressed the following bands are selected cyclically e AM FM or SAT if equipped Each band is highlighted by the corresponding wordings on the display The radio will be tuned to last station selected on the respective frequency band Preset Buttons The buttons numbered from 1 to 5 are used to set the following pre selections e 15 in the FM band 5 in FMA 5 in FMB 5 in FMC e 10 in the AM band 5 in AMA 5 in AMB e 15 in SAT if so equipped 5 SATA 5 SATB 5 SATC To listen to a preset station select the desired frequency band and then briefly press the corresponding preset button from 1 to 5 By pressing the preset button for more than 2 seconds the tuned station will be stored Pressing the A B C button will change between the preset memory group in the current frequency band Automatic Tuning Briefly press the 4 or button to start the automatic tuning search for the next station that can be received in the selected direction If the or gt button is pressed for longer the rapid search is started When the button is released the tuner will stop on the next station that can be received 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN Manual Tuning This is used to manually search for stations in the preselected band Select the desired frequency band and then press briefly and repeatedly the A or V button to start the search in the de
157. ects could be pushed into you causing serious injury Always sit upright as possible with your back against the seat back use the seat belts properly and use the Continued appropriate sized child restraint infant restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 WARNING Continued Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require perma nent attachments bolts or screws for installation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason Do not allow occupants to extend any part of their body outside of the window Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides enhanced protection and works together with the Driver Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front passenger and position the front occu pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bags Along with seat belts and pretensioners Advanced Front Air Bags and the Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag work with the knee impact bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls Occupant Restr
158. ed A Personal Portable Navigation Device PND is avail able as optional equipment for this vehicle refer to the Navigation User Guide for further information iPod USB MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL IF EQUIPPED This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into the USB port located in the glove compart ment UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 044035855 USB AUX Port 1 iPod Or External USB Device Holder 2 Cable Jack 3 USB Connector Refer to the appropriate Blue amp Me radio User s Manual for iPod or external USB device support capability 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches w P d 045033001 Remote Sound System Controls Back View Of Steering Wheel The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume Pressing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available AM FM SAT CD AUX Media Player etc and can also be used to select enter an item while scrolling through menu The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the c
159. ed or driven for at least 35 days 1 Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle 2 Cycle the ignition in the START position and release it when the engine starts A STARTING AND OPERATING 225 3 If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds cycle the ignition to the STOP OFF LOCK position wait five CAUTION seconds to allow the starter to cool then repeat the e Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it Extended Park Starting procedure started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans mission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel 4 If the engine fails to start after 8 attempts allow the i could enter the catalytic converter and once the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes then repeat the procedure engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If Engine Fails To Start To prevent damage to the starter do not continu ously crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again WARNING Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the After Starting throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up 226 STARTING AND OPERATING Turbocharger Cool Down This vehicle is equipped w
160. el Check The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions Routine fluid level checks are not required therefore the transmission has no dipstick Your authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level using special service tools If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunc tion visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission fluid level checked Operating the ve hicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage 380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN CAUTION If a transmission fluid leak occurs visit your autho rized dealer immediately Severe transmission dam age may occur Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately Fluid And Filter Changes Under normal operating conditions the fluid installed at the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle Routine fluid and filter changes are not required However change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated with water etc or if the trans mission is disassembled for any reason Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highl
161. elt Pretensioners Seat Belt Buckle Switch Continued and Seat Track Position Sensors 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way e Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB Label When the air bag deploys it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat s trim cover Each air bag Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB provide deploys independently a left side impact deploys the left enhanced protection to help protect an occupant duringa air bag only and a right side impact deploys the right air side impact The SAB are marked with an air bag label bag only sewn into the outboard side of the front seats Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC may offer side impact protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body struct
162. ent designed for this purpose following equip ment manufacturer s instructions Use of safety chains is mandatory Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle not to bumpers or associated brackets State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed If you must use the accessories wipers defrosters etc while being towed the ignition must be in the ON RUN position CAUTION DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission Damage to the drivetrain will result If these vehicles require towing make sure all drive wheels are OFF the ground Continued CAUTION Continued Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re quirements can cause severe transmission damage Damage from improper towing is not covered un der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Automatic Transmission e Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated e Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck all wheels off the ground If the ignition key is unavailable or the battery is discharged see Shift Lever Override in What To Do In Emergencies for instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK for towing 342 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN CAUTION DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission Damage to the drivetrain will result Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re quirements can cause s
163. enter The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will Seek up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will Seek down for the next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have pro grammed in the radio preset pushbutton CD Player Operation Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped Refer to the appropriate Blue amp Me User s Manual for further information CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
164. enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors ALR which are used to secure a child restraint system For additional information refer to Installing Child Re straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Restraints section The chart below defines the type of feature for each seating position Driver Passenger First Row N A ALR Second Row ALR ALR e N A Not Applicable ALR Automatic Locking Retractor If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant s mid section so as to not activate the ALR If the ALR is activated you will hear a ratcheting sound as the belt retracts Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort ably wrap around the occupant s mid section Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The Aut
165. equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment 6 INTRODUCTION QQoX DesdeoecouS ADAL DOLINA oan gn wg ego cse E qx 9 ARS HM s Am 7 OSON DLE COA amp COLMAR Bec Mmm numm vum app MeO e JST sess INTRODUCTION 7 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire Owners Manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cau tions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel visible through the windshield This number also appears engraved on the right front door sill under the sill scuff plate on an adhesive label applied to the right door opening on the B Pillar on the vehicle registration and title Vehicle Identification Number 8 INTRODUCTION VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death gt 010862580 Stamped VIN Location NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
166. er Me steering wheel or voice commands dia Player Functions To delete individual messages or the entire inbox using The media player enables the following operations the buttons on the steering wheel or voice commands Digital Audio Playback You can play all your digital audio files mp3 wma wav aac or play a The BLUE amp ME system can also recognize and read customized playlist m3u or wpl format abbreviations if any e g ILUVU will be read like I love you and interpret the most usual emoticons e g will be read like Smile that are currently used to write SMS texts Playback Options While playing tracks you can Me KAN id the i options Play Stop Next track With the BLUE amp ME media player you can play the Previous track Shuffle and Loop track digital audio files stored on a USB device by simply connecting it to the USB port located in the glove box of the car Audio File Selection By Category You can play all audio files of a certain category e g album artist or genre 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM NOTE WARNING The media player does not support audio files com pressed with other formats and DRM Digital Rights Management protected audio files Non supported audio files that may be present on the USB device will be ignored Driving while distracted can result in loss of ve hicle control accident and injury It is strongly recommended
167. er to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners abrasives or polishing compounds They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH Used on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain this finish a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383 CAUTION For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Do not use oven cleaner These products may damage the wheel s protective finish Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel s pro tective finish Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man ner Use MOPAR
168. erations Vehicle 8 Monitor Tire Pressure System ooo o oo o 283 Multi Function Control Lever 111 New Vehicle Break In Period 77 Occupant Restraints ooooooooooo ooo ooo 45 Occupant Restraints Sedan o ooooooo o o 26 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 293 Odometer 6 2 cee ee es 156 NTP His Pr 156 Oil Change Indicator 00 0000 162 Oil Change Indicator Reset 162 Oil Engine s ics uuo cea due Ed eae ee 353 Capacity A d eC es d bd RIS S 399 Change Interval ooooooooommoooo o 353 O tete Run reco S n 353 Disposal iia scere roce CS den exu E eR eda 356 Filter ce MT TL 356 A INDEX 431 Filter Disposal 54 ie eem ees 356 Identification LOgO erpai asea km ders 354 Materials Added to 0 0000 356 Recommendation 0 00000 e eee 354 Synthetie iria e ie BS RES 356 MISCOSITY iu see gae der RT dea RR IR Re de la 355 Oil Filter Selection o oo o 356 Onboard Diagnostic SysteM oooooooo o 349 Operating Precautions llle 349 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 5 Overheating Engine ooooooooooooooo ooo 155 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 5 Paint Cate ocras csse e n Reges 380 Parking Brake abesse e eem ER 244 Passing Light ooooooomommoomo o oo 112 PE 77 Placard Tire and Loading Information 265
169. erature it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather Three point lap and shoulder belts for all seating positions Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passen ger Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC for the driver and passengers seated next to a window Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB Knee bolsters blockers for front seat occupants Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 e All seat belt systems except the driver s include Automatic Locking Retractors ALRs which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat if equipped Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for Children LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems For more information on LATCH refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for Children Here are
170. es determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future CAUTION e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per form repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealer or qualified repair center Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter vals Do not use chemical flushes in these compo nents as the chemicals can damage your engine transmission or air conditioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunc tion use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 353 Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Do not check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold
171. es for more aggressive shifting This driving mode is useful while driving on twisty roads where more steering precision is desired in spirited cornering SPORT Button 248 STARTING AND OPERATING 1 To activate the Sport mode press the SPORT button SPORT Button Once activated a SPORT message will be displayed in the instrument cluster 2 Press the SPORT button again to return to the standard driving mode BRAKE SYSTEM In the event power assist is lost for any reason for example repeated brake applications with the engine off the brakes will still function The effort required to brake the vehicle will be significantly more than that required with the power system operating If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal capability the remaining system will still function with some loss of braking effectiveness This will be evident by increased pedal travel during application greater pedal force required to slow or stop and activation of the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light during brake use A STARTING AND OPERATING 249 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with a advanced electronic brake control system that includes the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Brake Assist System BAS Traction Con trol System TCS Hill Start Assist HSA and Electronic Stability Control ESC All systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving condi
172. ess the MENU button On will flash on the display 2 Press the DOWN V button Off will flash on the display 3 Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or press and hold the MENU button approxi mately one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settings Trip B Data Trip B On Through this option it is possible to activate On or deactivate Off the Trip B partial trip display For further information see Trip Computer For activation deactivation proceed as follows 1 Briefly press the MENU button 168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 2 Press the UP Aor DOWN V button to select Trip B data Press the UP Aor DOWN buttons to turn ON or OFF Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or press and hold the MENU button approxi mately one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settings Set Time Clock This function may be used to set the clock through two submenu items Time and Mode Proceed as follows 1 Briefly press the MENU button Press the UP Aor DOWN V buttons to highlight Set Time Press MENU button Press the UP Aor DOWN V button to navigate the two sub menu items Select the required option and then press the MENU button When accessing the Time sub menu item briefly press the MENU button and hours will flash on the display Press the UP Aor DOWN V butt
173. estment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns a F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 415 WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of FIAT Group Automobiles warranties applicable to this vehicle and market REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot
174. estraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In strap See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage for directions to attach a tether anchor 9 Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the seat belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direction Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the seat belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching Latch Plate CINCH If Equipped 1 Place the child seat in the center of the seating position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle you may wish to move it to its rear most position to make room for the child seat You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the car seat Next pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Finally pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint
175. eting 8 Corporate Communication S p A used under license by Chrysler Group LLC Copyright O 2013 Chrysler Group LLC e SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION 03 pra n ure RUE RE E RC S 3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE eee n 9 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE o o ooooooooooo m n tn 83 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL eee 9 crt 141 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 53 21 33 a RR EG ox ee e ec a d e A Rc 219 6 WHALE TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 4 9 a deor ad eR Rec a ce ce de EUR ICA d aaa ROAD Ce 303 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ss 4 3 x32 x eR drink ed ob ng eee ate ae P EA Sa dg Sede ERI ee 345 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES sie semiai 9A oS do o9 OR ae A oe ets eS eee ee ORC 403 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE eee e e m mt s 411 En INDEX oia aa Rs a d Re VR a a lead TOR E 2 rade A ak prd 421 INTRODUCTION CONTENTS M INTRODUCTION 0000 4 M VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER 7 ll HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL 5 B VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS 8 M WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS 7 4 INTRODUCTION HN INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new vehicle Be as sured that it represents precision workmanship distinc tive styling and high quality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This Owner s Manual has bee
176. evere transmission damage Damage from improper towing is not covered un der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Manual Transmission e Vehicle can be flat towed all four wheels on the ground with the transmission in NEUTRAL e Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated e Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck all wheels off the ground CAUTION Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require ments can cause severe engine and or transmission damage Damage from improper towing is not cov ered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions e Cut off fuel to the engine a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 343 e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed Unlock the doors automatically After the event occurs when the system is active the message Fuel Cutoff See Handbook is displayed Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine com partment and fuel tank before reset
177. f the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft cloth 386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Seat Belt Maintenance WARNING Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts If the belts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the car to not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt wash them Dry with a soft cloth assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn web Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if th P y app y SOUS bing etc buckles do not work properly Convertible Top Care If Equipped NOTE Lubricate the top rails with Berulub FR 43 every 2000 cycles or if scratching noises due to dust are present a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387 CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water da
178. f your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle 368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam age Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during
179. ff Switch Manual Transmission The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must NOTE The ESC Off switch is located left of the steering never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner column Manual Transmission Only which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others A STARTING AND OPERATING 255 ESC Operating Modes The ESC system has two available operating modes Full On This is the normal operating mode for ESC Whenever the vehicle is started the ESC system will be in On mode This mode should be used for most driving situations ESC should only be turned to Partial Off for specific reasons as noted below Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESC Off switch This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESC on again momentarily press the switch again This will restore the normal ESC On mode of Operation NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the switch Once the situation requir ing ESC to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESC back on by momentarily pressing the switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion 256 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING e When in Part
180. for ignoring it Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child Carefully read and follow all the instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner s Manual and on all the labels attached to the car seat Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 NOTE WARNING e For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Canadian residents should refer 1 2 collision an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so to Transport Canada s website for additional information e http www tc gc ca eng roadsafety safedrivers great that you could not hold the child no matter childsafety index 53 htm how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in
181. formance when us ing high quality unleaded regular gaso 9000255 ine with a minimum octane rating of 87 For optimum performance and fuel economy the use of 91 octane or higher is recommended Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of gasoline with the ap propriate octane rating for your engine before consider ing service for the vehicle STARTING AND OPERATING 293 FUEL REQUIREMENTS 1 4L Turbo RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATH mans ME TMOG This engine is designed to meet all emis sion regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded regular gaso 91 9090259 ine with a minimum octane rating of 87 For optimum performance and fuel economy the use of EB 91 octane or higher is recommended Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of gasoline with the ap propriate octane rating for your engine before consider i
182. from your authorized dealer Front Low and High HIR2 Beam Headlamp Front Parking Daytime W21 5W Running Lamps Front Fog Lamps H11 Front Side Marker Lamps W3W Front Turn Signal Lamps WY21W If a bulb needs to be replaced visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual 396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN BULB REPLACEMENT Front Turn Signal Parking And Daytime Running NOTE Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo tamps spheric conditions This will usually clear as atmospheric 1 Turn the steering wheel completely to the left or right conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process 2 Open the wheel housing access door Headlamps Low Beam and High Beam 1 Remove the plastic cap from the back of the headlamp housing Rotate the bulb counter clockwise Remove the bulb and replace as needed Install the bulb and rotate clockwise to lock in place a F C N Reinstall the plastic cap 073310799 Wheel Housing Access Door a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 397 3 7 Remove the plastic cap from the back of the lamp housing Rotate bulb socket counter clockwise Remove the bulb and replace as needed Install the bulb into socket and rotate bulb socket clockwise into lamp locking it in place Reinstall the plastic cap Front Fog Lamps To replace th
183. g of engine coolant antifreeze other than specified Organic Additive Technology OAT en gine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection Organic Additive Technology OAT engine cool ant is different and should not be mixed with NOTE Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer Selection Of Coolant Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT en gine coolant antifreeze or any globally compat ible coolant antifreeze If a non OAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency the cooling system will need to be drained flushed and refilled with fresh OAT coolant conforming to MS 12106 by an authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Continued A MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371 CAUTION Continued Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator e This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze Use of propylene gl
184. g the vehicle e Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to 060505162 be raised NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle e Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic while the vehicle is being jacked transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift Jacking Instructions WARNING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle Continued Continued a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 325 WARNING Continued Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change e If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic e To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground 6 gl ES Jack Warning Label NOTE Refer to the Compact Spare Tire section of the Tires General Information under Starting And Oper ating for information about the spare tire it s use and Operation CAUTION Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations
185. g the button at the base of the mirror A light to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated The sensor to the right of the button does not illuminate NOTE This feature is disabled when the vehicle is moving in reverse d 030435935 Adjusting Rearview Mirror UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 Power Mirrors The power mirror controls are located on the driver s door trim panel 030406002 Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never Power Mirror Switches spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The power mirror controls consist of a mirror select switch and a four way mirror control switch To adjust a mirror press the mirror select switch to either the L left or R right to select the mirror you need to adjust Using the mirror control switch press on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex m
186. ghtness level 2 Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or press and hold the MENU approximately one second to go back to the main screen without storing settings Speed Beep Speed Limit With this function it is possible to set the car speed limit mph or km h to immediately alert the driver when the set limit is exceeded To set the speed limit proceed as follows 1 Briefly press the MENU button to enter the Main MENU 2 Press the UP or DOWN V button to select Speed Beep Press the MENU button press the UP A or DOWN V buttons to select Speed Limit activation On or deactivation Off 3 When the function is activated On briefly press the MENU button to display the presently set activation speed Pressing the UP A or DOWN V buttons selects the speed limit Press MENU to confirm selection NOTE The setting can be increased or decreased by 5 mph or km h each time the UP DOWN button is pressed for speed settings above 20 mph 32 km h To increase or decrease the set speed rapidly press and hold the UP DOWN button Save the setting by briefly press ing the button when you approach the required setting Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or press and hold the MENU button approxi mately one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settings UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167 To cancel the setting proceed as follows 1 Briefly pr
187. h the valve stem and keep the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground This will provide the best positioning of the Continued 312 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN 4 kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and running the air pump Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in this position before proceed ing Place the transmission in PARK auto transmission or in Gear manual transmission and turn Off the igni tion Set the parking brake B Setting Up To Use TIREFIT 1 Push in the Mode Select Knob 5 and turn to the Sealant Mode position Uncoil the Sealant Hose 6 and then remove the cap from the fitting at the end of the hose Place the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground next to the deflated tire 4 Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose 6 onto the valve stem 5 Uncoil the Power Plug 8 and insert the plug into the vehicle s 12 Volt power outlet NOTE Do not remove foreign objects e g screws or nails from the tire C Injecting TIREFIT Sealant Into The Deflated Tire e Always start the engine before turning ON the TIRE FIT kit NOTE Manual transmission vehicles must have the parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL e After pressing the Power Button 4 the sealant white fluid will flow from the Sealant Bottle 1 through the Sealant Hose 6 and into the tire a WHAT TO DO IN EMERG
188. h as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface tempera ture of the seat 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM Head Restraints Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear WARNING The head restraints for all occupants must be prop erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu pying a seat Head restraints should never be ad justed while the vehicle is in motion Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision Reactive Head Restraints Front Seats The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with Reactive Head Restraints In the event of a rear impact the Reactive Head Restraints will automatically extend forward minimizing the gap between the back of the occupant s head and the Reactive Head Restraint To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press the push button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint Push Button The Reactive Head Restraints will automatically return to their normal position f
189. has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size Continued A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151 CAUTION Continued equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or s
190. he current setting The indicator illuminates when ON 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN NOTE e When in Defrost mode the Recirculation button will flash if pressed This indicates that you can not proceed to this mode due to fogging risk e When the Auto indicator is on and the Recirculation indicator is off the Recirculation is in AUTO mode If the Recirculation indicator is on the Recirculation setting is manual and Recirculation is on Automatic Operation 1 Press the AUTO button on the Automatic Temperature Control ATC Panel the indicator will illuminate when on 2 Next adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the temperature con trol buttons Once the desired temperature is dis played the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level 3 When the system is set up for your comfort level it is not necessary to change the settings You will experi ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically NOTE e tis not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles The system automatically adjusts the temperature mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible The temperature can be displayed in U S or Metric units by selecting the US M customer programmable feature Refer to the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in this section
191. he engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main tenance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning Continued 298 STARTING AND OPERATING HN ADDING FUEL CAUTION Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap s e Damage to the fuel system or emission control The gas cap is located on the passenger side of the system could result from using an improper fuel vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impu replacement cap is the correct one for this vehicle rities into the fuel system Also a poorly fitting f o aftermarket cap can cause the Malfunction Indi cator Light MIL to illuminate due to fuel vapors escaping from the system To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling WARNING Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle w
192. he sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition have the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367 WARNING CAUTION Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your ve hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con tact anything that can burn The catalytic converter requires the use of un leaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine perfor mance and cause serious damage to the engine Damage to the catalytic converter can result i
193. he vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing CAUTION Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could affect fuel economy and driveability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required WARNING A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such Continued WARNING Continued as dry plants wood cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occupants or others 19 Engine Temperature Warning Light This light warns of an overheated engine condi tion The engine coolant temperature indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for further information A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153 20 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions i
194. hen the gas cap is removed or the tank is being filled Fuel Filler Cap Continued A STARTING AND OPERATING 299 WARNING Continued Never add fuel when the engine is running It may cause the MIL to turn on and could cause a fire A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling NOTE e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full e Tighten the gas cap about 1 4 turn until you hear one click This is an indication that the cap is properly tightened f the gas cap is not tightened properly the MIL will come on Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel has been added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose improperly installed or damaged If the system detects a malfunction the gASCAP message will display in the odometer display Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL off
195. her your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the de signed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of parts which are not quality equivalent to genuine parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you 7 352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance servic
196. high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates This especially applies to children Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may deploy the Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC depending on the severity and type of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain air bag The inflating side curtain air bag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The air bag inflates in about 30 mil liseconds about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain air bag is about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed Front And Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE
197. hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged This will cause abnormal wear on the clutch REVERSE gear is not synchronized and the vehicle must be at a complete stop to shift into REVERSE gear When selecting REVERSE gear the driver should pause ap proximately 2 seconds after pushing in the clutch pedal and prior to shifting into REVERSE which allows gears to stop spinning Should an unwanted clash noise be pro duced the pause length should be increased NOTE e Clashing REVERSE gear especially if vehicle is mov ing can result in transmission damage During cold weather until the transmission lubricant is warm you may experience slightly higher shift efforts This is normal and not harmful to the trans mission 228 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Recommended Shift Speeds To use your manual transmission for optimal fuel economy it should be upshifted as listed in the following table Manual Transmission Recommended Shift Speeds Units In mph km h Engine Size Acceleration 1 to 2 2 to 3 3to4 4to5 Rate 1 4L 1 4L Turbo Accel 14 23 29 38 Engine 23 37 47 61 Cruise 12 18 25 32 19 29 40 52 A STARTING AND OPERATING 229 Downshifting When turning a corner or driving up a steep grade a downshift early so that the engine will not be overbur P hifting will i fuel roper downs 1 ting WL improve ue economy an dene d prolong engine life CAUTIONI AUTOMATIC TRANS
198. ht is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 24 Door Ajar This light will turn on to indicate that one or more doors or the trunk may be ajar 25 Vehicle Security Light If during starting the key code is not correctly recognized the Vehicle Security Light comes on in the instrument panel In this case turn the key to OFF and then to ON RUN if it is still locked try again with the other keys that come with the vehicle Contact a Fiat dealer if you still cannot start the engine UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155 If with the engine running the warning light flashes this means that the car is not protected by the engine inhibitor device Contact a Fiat dealer to have all the keys programmed 26 Temperature Gauge The temperature digital scale shows engine coolant tem perature Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range CAUTION Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If all the segments of the
199. ia vada 9B Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR If Transporting Pets ses er teres 77 PQUIDDEd gt secs das Xen x ocho eee 35 M ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS 77 Energy Management Feature 36 ML SAFETY TIPS poes 78 Seat Belt Pretensioners o o ooo o o 37 Transporting Passengers 00ooo o 78 Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System Exhaust Gas cruci cma te euer ta 78 BeltAlert llle 37 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Mehicl amp i21 e9e mt ie nae dees 79 Seat Belt Extender lessen 38 Mao f Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 39 The Vehicle a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The vehicle is supplied with a code card containing key The key fob contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE E er P ras duplicate dde eum transmitter with an integrated key To use the mechanical 7 eater PAE SOC YOn your NeW VENCE qas Me Sey b J code numbers for your vehicle locks These numbers can key simply press the mechanical key release button beused tordendaplitite keys Ignition Key Removal 1 Place the shift lever in PARK if equipped with an automatic transmission 2 Rotate the key to the OFF LOCK position 3 Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder 020274421 Mechanical Key Release Button 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE IM WARNING
200. ial Off mode the TCS functionality of ESC except for the limited slip feature de scribed in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESC Off Indicator Light will be illuminated When in Partial Off mode the engine power reduction feature of TCS is disabled and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC sys tem is reduced ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator ESC Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the MAR ACC ON RUN position for four seconds If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during accel eration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing roa
201. icle Information Center EVIC Display The EVIC consists of the following e System Status Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Outside Temperature Display Trip Computer Functions Tire Pressure Monitoring Display UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159 EVIC Displays ZEN uu WA o eos BE o Or Amma IO rm natn io aus d sog O ON OR E EEES os S gj 2 Ser S o EN KOE 041065141 NC 0 Premium Instrument Cluster rs 1 Ice Warning Indicator 6 Message Display SPORT Instrument Cluster 2 Temperature Indicator 7 Coolant Temperature Gauge 1 Temperature Indicator 6 Message Display 3 Fuel Level Gauge 8 Digital Speedometer 2 Fuel Level Gauge 7 Coolant Temperature Gauge 4 Clock 9 Autostick Gear Indicator 3 Clock 8 Digital Speedometer 5 Odometer 10 Auto Sport ECO Indicator 4 Odometer 9 Ice Warning Indicator 5 Sport Mode 10 Gear Shift Indicator GSI 160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL IE EVIC Control Buttons Press the MENU button briefly to access the menu and or go to next screen or to confirm the required menu option Press and hold the MENU button approximately one second to return to the main screen Press the UP A button to scroll upward through the displayed menu and the related options or to increase the displayed value Press the DOWN V button to scroll downwar
202. icle that is not equipped with seats and seat safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in a collision hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision the best Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and Continued adjust the seat 2 The seat belt latch plate is along side the pillar near the back of your seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Pulling Out The Latch Plate 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In WARNING WARNING Continued A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more e A belt buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap po
203. ift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Continued you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK turn the engine OFF and remove the ignition key Once the key is removed the transmission is locked in PARK securing the vehicle against un wanted movement When leaving the vehicle always remove the igni tion key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle Continued A STARTING AND OPERATING 231 WARNING Continued e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the transmission gear selector Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK OFF key removal position The key can only be re moved from the ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK OFF position and once removed the transmis
204. ight side of the steering wheel Electronic Speed Control Buttons a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec tronic Speed Control system has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control system can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system off push the ON OFF button a second time The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off The system should be turned off when not in use WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press the SET button and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET button 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pushing the
205. il Stop Backup And Turn Signal iln 389 D P LE E on Underhood Fuses ss dsrs sre Eire s e 391 center Pagh Mounted Stop Katai CHIME na E VEHICLE STORAGE sss 394 B FLUID CAPACITIES ppe adissa dronis rE 399 E REPLACEMENT BULBS 395 n a AO WB BULB REPLACEMENT ouuu 396 EA E d Chassis ceci ge e RR RR vata e es 401 Headlamps Low Beam and High Beam 396 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 347 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 1 4L 074610803 1 Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 Battery 2 Engine Oil Dipstick 6 Air Cleaner Filter 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 Engine Oil Fill 4 Front Distribution Unit Fuses 8 Washer Fluid Reservoir 348 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 1 4L TURBO 074844691 1 Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 Battery 2 Engine Oil Dipstick 6 Engine Oil Fill 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 Washer Fluid Reservoir 4 Front Distribution Unit Fuses a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 349 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require
206. ined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 Seat Height Adjustment The driver s seat height can be raised or lowered by using a lever located on the outboard side of the seat Pump the lever upward to raise the seat height or pump the lever downward to lower the seat height 0309027383 Height Adjuster 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM EZ Entry Feature The driver and front passenger seats have an EZ entry feature for rear seat passengers Pull forward on the release lever located on the outboard side of the seatback dump the seatback forward then slide the seat forward to allow access in and out of the rear seat EZ Entry Lever Lift the seatback upright and push the seat rearward to its locked position once the rear passengers are seated Memory Feature Both front seats have a memory feature which can operate in two ways Memory Function Option 1 Full Seat Back And Track Fore Aft Position Memory After using the EZ entry function the seatback angle and the Track fore aft adjuster can both re lock into the position they were most recently adjusted to This is accomplished if the seat is moved fully rearward to its last fore aft position on the tracks before the seat back is returned upright Memory Function
207. ing knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts a F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 417 Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams charts and detailed illustrations These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled vehicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshoot ing and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac quaint you with specific FIAT Group Automobiles ve hicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications capa bilities and safety tips e Call toll free at 1 800 890 4038 U S 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or e Visit us on the Worldwide Web at www techauthority com DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle 418 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE HN All passenger car
208. ions occur Oil Change Request Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Failure External Light Failure Fuel Cut Off Intervention Fuel Cut Off Not Available Parking Sensor Failure 148 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 9 Air Bag Warning Light e This light will turn on for four seconds as a ry bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN If the light is either not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 10 Cruise On Indicator If Equipped This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON For further information refer to Electronic Speed Control in Under standing Your Instrument Panel 11 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN this light will turn on If the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound When driving if the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 12 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN and remain on briefly
209. ir Bag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer O ry Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper able Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways WARNING Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per sonal injury e Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners Continued a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e Never place or install floor mats or other floor e Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly driver footwell while the vehicle is moving Ob secured to prevent them from moving
210. ir filter cover to the HVAC housing 072670489 072670493 Air Filter Cover Screw Locations A C Air Filter 4 Remove the A C air filter by pulling it straight out of 5 Install the A C air filter with the air filter position the housing Take note of the air filter position indica indicators pointing in the same direction as removal tors a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 363 CAUTION The A C air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through the filter Failure to properly install the filter will result in the need to replace it more often 6 Install the passenger side console closeout Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate decklid sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPARO Spray White Lube to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mecha nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated
211. irror Spotter Mirror If Equipped Some models are equipped with a driver s side spotter mirror The spotter mirror allows for a greater range of visibility on the driver s side of the vehicle 030436592 Spotter Mirror UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 Folding Mirrors The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to pivot forward or rearward to help avoid damage The mirror has three detent positions full forward normal and full rearward Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature can be activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster if equipped Refer to Rear 030436593 Window Features in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information Sun Visor Passenger Side Shown Sun Visors The driver and passenger sun visors are located on the headliner near the front windshield The sun visor can be rotated downward or up against the door glass Both sun visors are equipped with courtesy mirrors 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In BLUE amp ME HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION IF EQUIPPED Overview Windows Mobile based FIAT BLUE amp ME is a per sonal telematic system enabling you to use communica tion and entertainment applications expressly designed for use in the car The BLUE amp ME system installed on your car is equipped with a hands free kit message reader and media
212. is labeled AIRBAG This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB The SAB are marked with an air bag label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats NOTE Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment e After any collision the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately Air Bag System Components Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components Occupant Restraint Controller ORC n 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 Air Bag Warning Light Advanced Front Air Bag Features e Steering Wheel and Column The Advanced Front Air Bag system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as ES determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC e Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag which may receive information from the front impact sensors e Instrument Panel Knee Impact Bolsters Driver Advanced Front Air Bag WARNING Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag No objects should be placed over or near the air e Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB bag on ihe molum pand Because any sach e e objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a e Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate e Front and Side Impact Sensors e Front Seat B
213. ith an after run pump to cool the turbocharger after the engine is shut off Depending on the type of driving and the amount of cargo the pump will run for up to 10 minutes after the engine has been shut off to circulate coolant through the turbocharger Although the pump is rubber mounted for quiet opera tion it is normal to hear it running during this time MANUAL TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED Five Speed Manual Transmission WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended without having the parking brake fully applied The parking brake should al ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle especially on an incline Shift Lever Fully press the clutch pedal before you shift gears As you release the clutch pedal lightly press the accelerator pedal A STARTING AND OPERATING 227 NOTE To shift into REVERSE from NEUTRAL lift the ring under the knob and at the same time move the gearshift lever to the right and then backward Use each gear in numerical order do not skip a gear Be sure the transmission is in first gear not third when starting from a standing position Damage to the clutch can result from starting in third gear For most city driving you will find it easier to use only the lower gears For steady highway driving with light accelerations fifth gear is recommended Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal and never try to hold the vehicle on a
214. key fob is released or when it reaches the spoiler position NOTE If your power convertible top does not open with the remote please refer to the Power Convertible Top Relearn Procedure in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for additional information WARNING Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you Continued WARNING Continued Before operating the power top make sure that no moving parts of the convertible top can injure a person or animal e Never place any extremities hands feet etc near the convertible top components the upper wind shield area the shelf area behind the rear seats or the convertible top stowage area while raising or lowering the convertible top e When using the power top button on RKE trans mitter if potential danger exists while lowering the top release the button immediately to interrupt the operation Only drive the vehicle with the convertible top completely closed and latched or fully lowered into its stowage compartment Do not operate the power top when the vehicle is in motion 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE To Lock The Doors And Liftgate Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors and the liftgate The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal Programming Additional Trans
215. l gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor mance and damage the emissions control system Continued CAUTION Continued An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser vice Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor mance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer A STARTING AND OPERATING 297 NOTE Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run t
216. le Limited Warranty A STARTING AND OPERATING 295 If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms Operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on Poor engine performance Poor cold start and cold drivability ncreased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following Drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer Change the engine oil and oil filter Disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel MMT In Gasoline Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline 296 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Materials Added To Fuel Al
217. le off the jack WARNING Continued Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING IF EQUIPPED where it can be raised on a lift WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel Continued 320 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Jack Location Spare Tire Removal The jack and jack wrench tool are stowed in a bag under The spare tire is stowed to the underbody below the the front driver s seat cargo area 1 Remove the plug located in the rear cargo area 060535908 Jack And Jack Handle Location 0605001773 Winch Access Plug WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 321 2 Fit the wrench tool over the drive nut
218. ll either by using the contacts list or directly pronouncing the phone number to answer a call and also to answer another incoming phone call e To interact with BLUE amp ME you can use either the buttons on the steering wheel or voice commands With voice recognition you can perform system func tions by speaking voice commands also identified as keywords When the system recognizes a keyword it will respond with the appropriate action Voice recognition is an easy and convenient way to use BLUE amp ME All the system functions are available within the BLUE amp ME Main Menu When the car is not moving you can scroll through the complete menu by using either the buttons on the steering wheel or the voice commands When you are travelling you can interact with BLUE amp ME by using the buttons on the steering wheel or voice commands relevant only to phone functions LAST CALLS and PHONEBOOK and the media player To activate settings when travelling you can only use voice commands a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 The hands free kit enables the following operations e e Contact Calling By Voice You can call a contact in your mobile phone phonebook using your voice You can also call a contact in your phonebook by scanning through the entries on the multifunction display To use this option you have to transfer your mobile phone contacts to the hands free kit phonebook Digit Dialing By
219. lluminate the instru ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted that could affect the air bag system The diagnos tics also record the nature of the malfunction WARNING Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the air bags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad vanced Front Air Bags it signals the inflator units A large 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags Different air bag inflation rates are possible based on several factors including the collision type and severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to res
220. lt in sealant contacting internal TIREFIT kit components which may cause perma nent damage to the kit a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 315 D Drive Vehicle Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire drive the vehicle 5 miles 8 km or 10 minutes to ensure distribution of the TIREFIT Sealant within the tire Do not exceed 55 mph 90 km h WARNING TIREFIT is not a permanent flat tire repair Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using TIREFIT Do not exceed 55 mph 90 km h until the tire is repaired or replaced Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you E After Driving Pull over to a safe location Refer to Whenever You Stop to Use TIREFIT before continuing 1 Push in the Mode Select Knob 5 and turn to the Air Mode position 2 Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the vehicle s 12 Volt power outlet 3 Uncoil the Air Pump Hose 7 black in color and screw the fitting at the end of hose 7 onto the valve stem 4 Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure Gauge 3 If tire pressure is less than 19 psi 1 3 Bar The tire is too badly damaged Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further Call for assistance 316 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN If the tire pressure is 19 psi 1 3 Bar or higher 1 Press the Power Button 4 to turn on TIREFIT and inflate
221. ly the throttle during this short period of time the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill The 252 STARTING AND OPERATING HN system will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate e Vehicle must be stopped e Vehicle must be on a 2 5 manual transmission or 7 grade or greater automatic transmission hill Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction i e vehicle in NEUTRAL manual transmission vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear WARNING There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer when the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object Always remember the driver is responsible for brak ing the vehicle Disabling Enabling HSA If you wish to turn the HSA system on or off it can be done using the Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further informa tion Electronic Stability Control ESC This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under
222. mage stains or mildew on the top material Avoid high pressure car washes as they can dam age the top material Also increased water pressure may force past the weather strips e Remove any standing water from the top and dry the surface before opening it Operating the top opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicles interior Use care when washing the vehicle water pressure directed at the weather strip seals may cause water to leak into the vehicles interior Immediate removal of any contaminant is recommended Regular washing of the top will enhance its life and appearance and make successive cleanings easier Do not subject the top to excessive heat Frequently vacuum the top and storage compartment Washing Hand washing is highly recommended Automatic car washing equipment can damage the top material If you must use an automatic car wash soft cloth systems are preferred CAUTION Avoid high pressure car washes as they can damage the top material Also increased water pressure may force water past the weather strips General Cleaning Careful vacuuming of the top before washing is helpful in removing dust and other foreign particles Wash in partial shade instead of direct sun Wet the entire vehicle 388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN before washing the top The top should be washed with a soft natural bristle scrub brush and a mild soap s
223. main screen without storing the settings Language Selecting The Language The messages can be displayed in the following lan guages Italian English Turkce Nederlands Spanish French Dutch Polish Brasilian To set the required language proceed as follows Buzzer Volume Adjusting The Failure Warning Buzzer Volume With this function the volume of the buzzer accompany ing any failure warning indication can be adjusted to one of eight volume levels To adjust the volume proceed as follows UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173 1 Briefly press the MENU button Press the UP Aor DOWN V button to highlight Language Press the MENU button to enter the Language MENU Press the UP A or DOWN V button for setting Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or press and hold the MENU button approxi mately one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settings 1 Briefly press the MENU button Press the UP Aor DOWN V button the highlight the Buzzer Volume Press the MENU button to enter the Buzzer Volume MENU Press the UP A or DOWN Y button for setting Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or press and hold the MENU button approxi mately one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settings 174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Button Volume Button Volume Adjustment This function may be used to adjust the volu
224. mate Control o oo 206 Clutch sas ic Beg Se a A aad 375 Clutch Fluid y uuu engra a eae da 375 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 205 Compact Spare Dre coce emis e ga 275 Connector UCL se teases O ON 203 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 203 Contract Servicess 4 4224 ene a a ed 414 Convertible Top Maintenance 386 Coolant Antifreeze lesen 399 Cooling System atico ex cse eR n eren RR one a 369 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 371 Coolant Level o oooooooo ooo o 369 Disposal of Used Coolant 373 Drain Flush and Refill 369 InSpectiOn dace eeu eee Te WRI aude 373 Points to Remember llle 372 Press re Cap sons o RS 372 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 370 Corrosion Protection llle 380 Cruise Light 2 0 0 0 0 00000000000 148 Cupholders 64 2522 arar ae la 136 Customer Assistance 0 0 0 0 00 eee eens 412 Data Recorder Event nannan naaa aea 55 Daytime Running Lights A INDEX 425 Dealer Service o o oooooooooooo oo o Defroster Windshield Diagnostic System Onboard Dipsticks Automatic Transmission Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant Door LOCKS codex ia Door Locks Automatic Downshifting Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water Electrical Power Outlets Electric Remote Mirrors
225. me of the beep accompanying the buttons MENU UP Aor DOWN buttons can be adjusted according to 8 levels To adjust the volume proceed as follows 1 Briefly press the MENU button Press the UP Aor DOWN V button to highlight the Buzzer Volume press the MENU button 2 Press the UP Aor DOWN V button for setting 3 Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or press and hold the MENU button approxi mately one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settings Belt Buzzer Buzzer Activation For S B R Indication This function will only be displayed after a FIAT Group Automobiles dealership has deactivated the S B R system Daytime Running Lamps DRL This function may be used to activate deactivate the Daytime Running Lamps Proceed as follows to switch this function on or off 1 Briefly press the MENU button Press the Up Aor DOWN V button to highlight Daytime Running Lamps DRL Press the MENU button to enter the DRL MENU 2 Briefly press the MENU button On or Off will flash on the display according to previous setting 3 Press the UP Aor DOWN V button for setting A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175 4 Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or press and hold the button approximately one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settings GSI Gear Shift Indicator This function may be used to set the Gear Shift
226. mission overheating and failure Allow the en gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle NOTE Press the ESC Off switch to place the Electronic Stability Control ESC system in Partial Off mode before rocking the vehicle Refer to Electronic Brake Control in Starting And Operating for further infor mation Once the vehicle has been freed press the ESC Off switch again to restore ESC On mode CAUTION When rocking a stuck vehicle by shifting be tween DRIVE 2nd gear and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drive train damage may result e Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h while in gear no trans mission shifting occurring 338 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or even failure of the axle and tires A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter wh
227. mitters Refer to Sentry Key Customer Key Programming If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter contact your authorized dealer for details Transmitter Battery Replacement NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may ap ply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 1 Press the mechanical key release button and release the mechanical key to access the battery case screw located on the side of the Key Fob 020274421 Mechanical Key Release Button 2 Rotate the screw located on the side of the Key Fob using a small screwdriver THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 021441822 021336637 Key Fob Screw Location Battery Case Removed 3 Take out the battery case Remove and replace the 4 Refit the battery case inside the Key Fob and turn the battery observing its polarity screw to lock it into place 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE HI General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmit
228. n RAB Radio Speed Beep Press the V button to return to the last menu option Daylights 178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN Introduction The radio has been designed according to the specifica tions of the passenger compartment with a personalized design to match the style of the dashboard If the radio has BLUE amp ME refer to the appropriate BLUE amp ME User s Manual for further information The instructions for use are given below and we recom mend you to read them carefully Suggestions Road Safety Please learn how to use all different radio functions e g store stations before beginning to drive Reception Conditions Reception conditions change constantly while driving Reception may be interfered with by the presence of mountains buildings or bridges or when you are far away from the broadcaster WARNING Having the volume turned up high can cause the driver to not be able to hear important traffic sounds i e sirens horns etc Failure to hear traffic sounds and other important audible information can result in serious injury or death Always adjust the volume so that you can still hear background noises Care And Maintenance Clean the cover with a soft antistatic cloth only Cleaning and polishing products could damage the surface a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179 CDs The presence of dirt scratches or distortions on the CDs could cause skipping and poo
229. n direction and release the switch Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window LIFTGATE To unlock the liftgate use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or activate the power door lock switches located on the driver door handle To open the liftgate squeeze the liftgate release handle and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion 022235849 Liftgate Handle 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems WARNING Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle e If you are required to drive with the liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed Do not use the recirculation mode NOTE Gas props support the liftgate in the open posi tion However because the gas pressure drops with temp
230. n prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by Warranty Information and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle The enclosed Warranty Information lists the services that FIAT Group Automobiles offers to its customers The Warranty Certificate with terms and conditions for maintaining its validity The range of additional services available to FIAT Group Automobiles customers NOTE After reviewing the owner information it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc ing and remain with the vehicle when sold When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained techni cians and genuine parts and cares about your satisfaction a INTRODUCTION 5 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual fT Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains a complete listing of all subjects contains the information you desire Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout Si h ificati f hicl d h ince the specification of your vehicle depends on the this Owner s Manual items of
231. ncluding brake fluid level and parking brake application If the Brake Warning Light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the brake system reservoir BRAKE The light will remain on until the cause is corrected If brake fault is indicated immediate repair is necessary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous You could have a collision Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD fault the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF LOCK position to the ON RUN position The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON RUN posi tion NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN 21 Electronic Stability Control O
232. ncrease the traction afforded by prevail ing road conditions The BAS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system Brake Limited Differential BLD functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in the Partial Off mode Refer to Electronic Stability Control ESC in this section for further information Hill Start Assist HSA The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes his foot off the brake pedal If the driver does not app
233. nd cold tire inflation pressures While studded tires improve performance on ice skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded tires Some states pro hibit studded tires therefore local laws should be checked before using these tire types Run Flat Tires If Equipped Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles 80 km at 50 mph 80 km h after a rapid loss of inflation pressure This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of or below 14 psi 96 kPa Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi ately A Run Flat tire is not repairable It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat mode See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor mation A STARTING AND OPERATING 275 Spare Tires If Equipped NOTE For vehicles equipped with TIREFIT instead of a spare tire please refer to TIREFIT KIT in What To Do In Emergencies for further information CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact full size or limited use temporary spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel If Equipped Yo
234. ng a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle s interior Continued 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE In CAUTION Continued closing to the one quarter open and three quarter open Use care when washing the vehicle water pressure comfort stops or if the remote keyless power top function is inoperable or if the trunk lid does not open directed at the weather strip seals may cause water the following relearn procedure may be necessary to leak into the vehicle s interior 1 Confirm that the door trunk lid are closed WARNING 2 Begin with the top in the fully closed position using 7 manual mode The convertible top does not provide the structural protection that a reinforced metal roof does and the fabric top cannot be expected to prevent the ejection of the occupants in a collision Therefore it is impor tant that all occupants wear their seat belts at all times Death or serious injuries could occur if you are ejected from the vehicle during a collision Power Convertible Top Relearn Procedure If your power convertible top does not operate in the Auto Opening Closing mode automatically opening 3 Hold the OPEN button to move the top to the fully open position CONTINUE to hold the OPEN button for an addi tional three seconds Release the OPEN button Hold the CLOSED button to move the top to the fully closed po
235. ng service for the vehicle 294 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasoline contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso line Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 Ethanol Methyl Tert Butyl Ether MTBE and Ethyl Tret Butyl Ether ETBE Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION Do not use gasoline containing Methanol or E 85 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability problems and may damage critical fuel system components Problems that result from using methanol gasoline blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Methanol E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non Flex Fuel Vehicles FFV are compatible with gaso line containing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the New Vehic
236. ng wheel to activate the washers The wipers will activate automatically for three cycles after the lever is released CAUTION Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any position other than off In cold weather always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the Park posi tion before turning off the engine If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted Continued 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION Continued Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off position If the windshield wiper control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position damage to the wiper motor may occur Rear Windshield Wiper Rotate the end of the windshield wiper washer lever upward to the first detent past the intermittent settings for intermittent wipe operation With the front wind shield wiper active rotate the end of the windshield wiper washer lever upward The rear wiper will operate in the same mode as the front windshield wipers but at half the frequency When the transmission is shifted into REVERSE the rear wiper will automatically operate at Low Speed and return to normal operation when the transmission is
237. nitial deceleration The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli sions and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating air bag The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 ON RUN or START position If the key is in the OFF LOCK position or not in the ignition the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment e Also the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning ry Light in the instrument panel for approxi mately four to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup It also includes diagnostics that will i
238. ns i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits A STARTING AND OPERATING 261 EXAMPLE Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load LL Light load tire C D E E G Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry EM this tire Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for Tire Identification Number TIN The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire however the date code may only be on one side Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire 262 STARTING AND OPERATING HN EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing loc
239. o o o 26 Exhaust System sar is a erst AR eqs 78 Exterior Lights 4 uec ie ere PEE AS 82 Filler Location Fuel o ooooo o oo 157 Filters Aur Cleaner a5 632 08 48 204 00 UE AS Red asks 356 Air Conditioning i xe eke RS RR le 360 Engine Fuel 5 daas bere Eg 400 Engine OW iii da EUIS erba RR dria 356 Engine Oil Disposal o oooooomoooo o 356 Flashers T rn Signal ts ds A a 82 Flooded Engine Starting o oooooooooo o 225 Fluid Brake 0 aida ale ee ea Ged 401 Fluid Capacities o ooooooooooooooooo ooo 399 Fluid eas a tia ic tadas de EE 82 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission 379 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 400 Eo Lights 3a se RE TES NUS quesos 115 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 336 lu Tx 293 a INDEX 427 Adding ues as baaa eR whe ia i 298 Additv S oo dc cada aaa A E s 296 Capacity 0 ira iE e ba E ERE ii 399 Clean Alt kde aded acea ac X x dO C OR 294 CLOUD iran ea Morir 50 Filler Cap Gas Cap aa dee dere Rn een 157 Filler Door Gas Cap ooooooooommmo o o 157 Gasol os iia a a ta d 293 Gauge si AAA 157 Lights ie a0 saree eee ea serp 3 ek a 147 Materials Added o o o oo cee eee 296 Octane Rating 293 Requirements lesse 293 Tank Capacity is oec oe ed ede cde ta 399 Fuelitig iz ese ote em o Ren eee beo ires 298 FUSS 5 sec a nece mcum dise EES SX EIE S 388 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap
240. o use Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN Operating Tips Window Fogging Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside the vehicle is high This often occurs in mild or cool temperatures when it s rainy or humid In most cases turning the air conditioning pressing the A C button on will clear the fog Adjust the temperature control air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort As the temperature gets colder it may be necessary to direct air onto the windshield Adjust the temperature control and blower speed to maintain comfort Higher blower speeds will reduce fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the Defrost mode Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a non filming cleaning solution vinegar and water works very well will help prevent contaminates cigarette smoke perfumes etc from sticking to the windows Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging NOTE Automatic Temperature Controls ATC will au tomatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield When this occurs recirculation will be unavailable Summer Operation NOTE In some cases during high temperature opera tion the air conditioning system performance may be reduced This is to help protect the engine from overhea
241. oe se wee RUP IE a 112 Passing sas aa Hare wy alse Samara inier Sos 112 Seat Belt Reminder 000 148 DELVICE Los anaes badd Abad ad 396 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator 151 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 149 Traction Control oooooooo 000 eee eee 256 Turn Sienal sume dao b eed eqs 82 Voltage iue nee Suede EA etr e RR 148 WaittoStart llle 146 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 146 Loading Vehicle OS A SiS ane Ae ee d S 264 Locks Atomatic Door oae sede RR E TS seaweed weed ted Wee Ss reg Power DOOR cux te ae ee anota RE vss Lubrication Body sss cse os nme 430 INDEX In tig NUtS cae Sen eig eme etn 317 Maintenance Free Battery o o o o o o 357 Maintenance General 352 Maintenance Procedures o o oo ooo oo 352 Maintenance Schedule o o oo ooo o 404 Maintenance Schedules o o o oo oo 404 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 151 Manual Service io os a yx EORR 416 Manual Transmission l l 226 Fluid Level Check 378 Frequency of Fluid Change 378 Lubricant Selection oo oooooo oo 378 Master Cylinder Brakes 375 Media Hub esos ku e ERR RR RS 99 Mirrors cs mc daa EG vr SEU RR D Rd 89 Automatic Dimming lees 90 Electric Powered llle 91 Heated Modifications Alt
242. of SIRIUS Satellite Receiver Module tune to Channel 0 Make sure that when the order is placed the ESN are correct If any of the ESN numbers are not entered correctly then the SIRIUS subscription will not be able to be transferred to the new radio and will not be active when installed in the customer s vehicle A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 Satellite Radio Antenna If Equipped The antenna for the satellite radio is mounted on the roof of the vehicle Do not place items on the roof around the roof top antenna location Objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items should be placed as far from the antenna as possible Do not place items directly on or above the antenna CD Player Introduction This chapter describes the operation of the CD player only To operate the radio refer to the description in the Functions and Adjustments chapter CD Player Selection To activate the CD player built into the equipment proceed as follows Load a CD with the equipment switched on The first track will start to play or e If a CD has already been loaded turn on the radio and then briefly press the MEDIA button to select the CD function mode The last track listened to will start to play It is advisable to use original CDs to ensure optimal playing If CD R RWs are used we recommend using good quality media that are burned at the slowest spee
243. of the manual To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic mode during cold start ups the blower fan will remain A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 on low until the engine warms up The blower will increase in speed and transition into AUTO mode Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features NOTE Each of these features operates independently from each other If any feature is controlled manually temperature control will continue to operate automati cally Blower Control OS There are 12 fixed blower speeds Use the blower control up or down buttons to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select The blower speed increases as 045635943 you press or hold the blower control v up button and decreases when you press or hold the blower control down button The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by pressing the blower control up or down buttons The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the AUTO mode The operator can also select the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the following positions Panel Mode Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air The air vanes of the center outlets and
244. ollowing a rear impact If the Reactive Head Restraints do not return to their normal position see your authorized dealership immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 NOTE The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians for service purposes only If either of the head restraints require removal see your autho rized dealership WARNING Do not place items over the top of the Reactive Head Restraint such as coats seat covers or portable DVD players These items may interfere with the operation of the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IA Rear Head Restraints To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press the push button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for information on tether routing 030936590 eo Push Button a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 2 Rotate the safety catch under the front edge of the To open the hood two latches must be released hogd Meat ihe cante MM 1 Pull the bottom of the RED hood release lever located on the left kick panel rearward 031335904 Hood Safety Latch Location Hood Release Lever 110 UNDERSTAN
245. ols and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer They want to know if you need assistance If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con cern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center e Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealer name e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage FIAT CUSTOMER CENTER P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 1 800 423 6343 FIAT CANADA CUSTOMER CENTER P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 1 800 465 2001 English Phone 1 800 387 9983 French Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter 414 TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian re
246. olution such as liquid dishwashing soap Do not use detergent CAUTION Never use an abrasive type cleaner or bleaches Cleaners should not contain silicones organic sol vents petroleum distillates or plasticizers Always wait until the top is thoroughly dry before lowering it into the storage area Scrub in all directions covering an area of about two square feet at a time Avoid heavy scrubbing Rinse the entire vehicle with water to remove all soap and dirt from the top fabric and to prevent streaking on painted and chrome surfaces Allow the top to dry before lowering Vacuuming the top with a wet dry shop vacuum will decrease the top s drying time ensure removal of all dirt and delete streaks in the material Multiple cleanings may be necessary to remove stubborn stains If stains persist contact your local authorized dealer for further suggestions FUSES WARNING When replacing a blown fuse always use an ap propriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the original fuse Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury fire and or property dam age Continued MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389 WARNING Continued Interior Fuses Before replacing a fuse make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other services are switched off and
247. omatic Locking Mode is avail able on all passenger seating positions with a combina tion lap shoulder belt Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In position that has a belt with this feature Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor ALR feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual e Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help further redu
248. on for setting Briefly press the MENU button and minutes will flash on the display Press the UP Aor DOWN V button for setting NOTE The setting will increase or decrease by one unit each time the UP A or DOWN V button is pressed Press and hold the button to increase decrease the setting rapidly Save the setting by briefly pressing the button when you approach the required set ting Briefly press the MENU button to return to the Time sub function When accessing the Mode submenu briefly press the MENU button The previously set display format will flash on the display e Press the UP Aor DOWN V button to select 24h or 12h When you have selected the required settings briefly press the MENU button to go back to the Time Mode sub menu screen or press and hold the MENU button approximately one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settings Set Date This function may be used to set the date day month year To change the date proceed as follows UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169 1 Briefly press the MENU button Press the UP Aor DOWN V button to highlight Date press the MENU button and Year will begin to flash 2 Press the UP Aor DOWN V button for setting 3 Briefly press the MENU button and month will flash on the display 4 Press the UP A or DOWN V button for setting 5 Briefly press the MENU button and day will flash on the
249. onsume some oil during its WARNING Continued first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered a normal part of the break in and It is extremely dangerous to ride in a Cargo arca not interpreted as a problem inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously SAFETY TIPS injured or killed Transporting Passengers Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and AREA using a seat belt properly WARNING Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death Breathing it can make you unconscious and can Continued eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Continued a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 WARNING Continued Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area f you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate rear doors open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT
250. or the three quarter open spoiler position Push the top open button for approximately one second a second time to fully open the convertible top Manual Open For manual open push and hold the open button until desired roof position or until spoiler position a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 NOTE Vertical movement only operates in auto open close mode Raising The Power Top Auto Close From the convertible top fully open position push the top close button for approximately one second for the three quarter open spoiler position Push the top close button for approximately one second a second time for the one quarter open position Push and hold close button to fully close convertible top Manual Close For manual close push and hold the close button until desired position until one quarter open position Push and hold again for full close position NOTE Rail lubrication is recommended every 2000 cycles or if scratching noises due to dust are present Refer to Fluids Lubes and Genuine Part in Maintain ing Your Vehicle for information CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage stains or mildew on the top material Avoid high pressure car washes as they can dam age the top material Also increased water pressure may force water past the weather strips Remove any standing water from the top and dry the surface before opening it Operating the top openi
251. or closed The switch on the right side of the overhead console controls the map or reading function of the lights Press the switch to the right to turn on the right light and press the switch to the left to turn on the left light CAUTION Before getting out of the vehicle be sure that the switch is in the center position or that the lights are off to avoid draining the battery Interior Light Timing Center Position There are four different modes of operation that can be activated in this position When one door is opened a three minute timer is activated When the key is removed from the ignition within two minutes of the ignition being turned off a 10 second timer is activated A UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 e When the doors are unlocked with the Key Fob a 10 second timer is activated When the doors are locked with the Key Fob the lights will turn off Interior Light Timing On Right Position e When all doors are closed a 15 minute timer is activated NOTE The timer is deactivated when the key is moved into the ON RUN position Front Fog Lights If Equipped The fog light switch is located on the center stack of the instrument panel just below the radio 031473219 Fog Light Switch Press the switch once to turn the front fog lights on Press the switch a second time to turn the front fog lights off 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WINDSHIELD W
252. or disengaged e If the replaced fuse blows again contact an autho The interior fuse panel is part of the Body Control Module BCM and is located on the driver s side under the instrument panel rized dealer If a general protection fuse for safety systems air bag system braking system power unit systems engine system gearbox system or steering system blows contact an authorized dealer 072710801 Fuse Panel 390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Cavity Vehicle Fuse Number Mini Fuse Description 1 F12 7 5 Amp Brown Right Low Beam 2 F32 5 Amp Tan Front and Rear Ceiling Lights Trunk and Door Courtesy Lights 3 F53 5 Amp Tan Instrument Panel Node 4 F38 20 Amp Yellow Central Door Locking 5 F36 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Socket Car Radio Climate Control System 6 F43 20 Amp Yellow Bi Directional Washer 7 F48 20 Amp Yellow Passenger Power Window 8 F13 7 5 Amp Brown Left Low Beam Headlamp Leveling 9 F50 7 5 Amp Brown Airbag 10 F51 5 Amp Tan Car Radio Switch Climate Control System Stop Light Clutch 11 F37 5 Amp Tan Stop Light Switch Instrument Panel Node A MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391 Cavity Vehicle Fuse Number Mini Fuse Description 12 F49 5 Amp Tan Exterior Mirror GPS Electric Mirror Parking Sensor 13 F31 5 Amp Tan Ignition Climate Control 14 F47 20 Amp Yellow Driver Power Window Underhood Fuses The Front Distribution Unit
253. ossibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385 Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPARO Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Instrument Panel Cover The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which minimizes reflections on the windshield Do not use protectants or other products which may cause undesir able reflections Use soap and warm water to restore the low glare surface Instrument Panel Bezels CAUTION When installing hanging air fresheners in your ve hicle read the installation instructions carefully Some air fresheners will damage the finish of painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly contact any surface Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front o
254. ou can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157 NOTE If the vehicle is equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in the instrument cluster all warnings including door and gate and Change Engine Oil will only be displayed in the EVIC display Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel 28 Fuel Gauge Fuel Door Reminder The fuel door reminder indicates that the fuel filler door is located on the right side of the vehicle When the ignition switch is in the ON RUN position the digital scale will show the level of fuel remaining in the fuel tank NOTE The fuel gauge and range will not immediately update accurately when refueling with the engine on 29 Tachometer The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 for each gear range Before reaching the red area ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage 30 Speedometer The Speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per hour mph and or kilometers per hour km h 158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster 0409015376 Electronic Veh
255. own on the tire placard Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle s loading capacity the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures 264 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the driver s side door 055001823 B Pillar Location For Tire And Loading Information Placard Tire And Loading Information Placard SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3 THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF qu anos e SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX KG QR TIRE FRONT SPARE ORIGINAL TIRE SIZE PI9570R14 P195 70R14 T125 70D15 COLD TIRE SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 4N109268 Tire And Loading Information Placard 811b5a9a STARTING AND OPERATING 265 This placard tells you important information about the 1 Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 Total weight your vehicle can carry 3 Tire size designed for your vehicle 4 Cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures s
256. oyment occurs the SABIC and SAB air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided in If You Need Consumer Assistance WARNING Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the air bags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury including death Air bags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel Continued a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 WARNING Continued e Side air bags also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat e In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buck led up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver
257. passed o o o o o o o 2 2 2 2 e 2 whichever comes first S S S S S S S S S S S S 8 S alal 5o SD RI9 9 9 E S 2 3 0 Or Years 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 sgass sess ss 8 8 38g 82 8 3 8 8S9 QS 8 3 Inspect parking brake function Adjust as necessary a 2 x A X X Additional Maintenance Replace engine air filter X X X X X Replace cabin air filter X X X X X X X Clean and lube sun roof tracks X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Replace spark plugs 1 4L Engine Replace spark plugs 1 4L Turbo Engine X X X X X 408 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES HN i i e e e e e e Mileage or time passed ae elg g 38 2 2 2 3 3 S S e 3 whichever comes first o o o 9 e e e c gt o c c e e oic e e e e S e S S g 4 A e i5 e N co o Or Years 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Or Kilometers o o e oe e e 2 2 e 2 2 e 2 zgg222 2 5 8 55 5 5 8 N co s e de o FO oc o ry SAIZ EISI 2 a a a Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150 000 X X miles 240 000 km whichever comes first Inspect and replace PCV valve if X necessary Replace the timing belt X The spark plug change interval is mileage based only yearly intervals do not apply a MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 409 WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you h
258. pecified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual 266 STARTING AND OPERATING HN NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and T ine th i loadi iti f E o determine the maximum loading conditions of your passengers that will be riding in your vehicle vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 lbs 68 kg 750 lbs 340 kg and 1400 lbs 635 kg 750 lbs 340 kg 650
259. played After the last track in a folder is played the next folder will be played Structure Of The Folders The radio with MP3 player e Recognizes only the folders that effectively contain MP3 format files 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HEN e If the MP3 files on a CD ROM are structured in sub folders their structure is compressed to a single level structure where the sub folders are taken to the level of the main folders Troubleshooting General Sound Volume Low The Fader function should be adjusted to the values F front only to prevent the reduction in radio output power and the cancelling of the volume if the Fader level adjustment is equal to R49 Source Can Not Be Selected Nothing has been loaded Load the CD or the MP3 CD to be listened to CD Player The CD Does Not Play The CD is dirty Clean the CD The CD is scratched Try using another CD The CD Can Not Be Loaded A CD is already loaded Press the amp button and remove the CD MPS File Reading Track Skips While Playing Mp3 Files The CD is scratched or dirty The Duration Of The Mp3 Tracks Is Not Correctly Displayed In some cases due to the recording mode the duration of the MP3 tracks can be displayed incorrectly Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped Refer to the appropriate BLUE amp ME User s Manual for further information Personal Portable Navigation Device PND If Equipp
260. player and it is preset for future installation of additional services The BLUE amp ME system fully integrated with voice commands buttons on the steering wheel and multifunc tion display messages gives you the possibility of inter acting with your Bluetooth wireless technology mobile phone even if you keep it in your pocket or bag without having to take your eyes off the road or remove your hands from the steering wheel To use voice commands you are not required to train the voice recognition system to recognize your voice This implies that the system is nearly equally performing with different persons i e the voice recognition system is of the speaker independent type With this system you can also play your favorite music stored on USB device and select tracks and playback modes with both voice commands or buttons on the steering wheel This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules subject to the following two conditions This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept all interference received in cluding interference that may cause undesired opera tion a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 The Hands Free Kit The basic characteristic of this hands free kit is voice recognition with Bluetooth wireless technology With this system you can make and receive calls safely and securely by using either voice commands or buttons on the steering wheel This can be
261. quipped Selection Of Lubricant It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life Use only the manufacturer s specified transmission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for fluid specifications It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission only the approved lubricant should be used a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379 CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for fluid specifications Special Additives The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any special additives in the transmission Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Fluid Lev
262. quire extra heat to the wind shield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 reducing moisture on the windshield Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode 6 Front Defrost Press and release to change the current setting The indicator illuminates when ON The blower will auto matically default to medium high if the Defrost mode is selected Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode 7 Floor Mode Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demister outlets 8 Panel Mode Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear 9 Blower Control Down Button There are 12 blower speeds The blower speed decreases as you press this button Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode 10 Temperature Control Down Button Provides temperature down control Push the button for cooler temperature settings 11 Climate Control ON OFF Button Press and release to turn the Climate Control ON or OFF 12 Recirculation Control Button Press and release to change t
263. r sound quality while it is playing For optimal playback conditions follow these guidelines e e Only use branded CDs Clean every CD thoroughly removing any finger marks or dust using a soft cloth Hold CDs by the outside and clean them from the middle outwards Never use chemicals e g antistatics or thinners or sprays for cleaning as they could damage the surface of the CDs After listening to them place CDs back in their boxes to prevent them from being damaged Do not expose CDs to direct sunlight high tempera tures or moisture for long periods Do not stick labels on the CD surface or write on the recorded surface with pencils or pens Do not use CDs that are very scratched flawed distorted etc Using discs like these will result in malfunctions or damage to the player The use of original CD media is required for the best quality audio production Correct operation is not guaranteed when CD R RW media are used that were not correctly burned and or with a maximum capacity above 650 Mb Do not use commercially available protective sheets for CDs or discs with stabilizers etc as they could get stuck in the internal mechanism and damage the disc If a copy protected CD is used it may take a few seconds before the system starts to play it The CD player cannot be guaranteed to play all protected discs The fact that the CD is protected from being 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INN e
264. ration of the CD MP3 player NOTE Layer 3 audio decoding technology is licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL HN MP3 Mode In addition to playing regular audio CDs the radio is also enabled to play CDROMs on which compressed audio files have been recorded in an MP3 format To guarantee optimal reproduction it is advisable to use good quality CDs burned at the lowest speed possible The files on an MP3 CD are structured in folders that create lists of all the folders containing MP3 tracks folders or subfolders are all on the same level The folders that do not contain MP3 tracks cannot be selected The specifications and operating conditions for playing MP3 files are the following e The CD ROMs used should be burned in accordance with ISO standard 9660 The music files should have the extension mp3 or wma files with a different extension will not be reproduced The sampling frequencies that can be reproduced are 44 1 kHz stereo from 96 to 320 kbit s 22 05 kHz mono or stereo from 32 to 80 kbit s Tracks with a variable bit rate can be reproduced NOTE The track names must not include the following characters spaces apostrophes and open and close brackets During the burning of a MP3 CD make sure that the names of the files do not contain these characters if not the radio will not be able to play the tracks involved
265. raveling into strong head winds use the AutoStick shift control refer to the AutoStick in this section for further information to select a lower gear Under these conditions using a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operat ing limits the transmission controller will expand the range of torque converter clutch engagement This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheat ing During cold temperatures transmission operation may be modified depending on engine coolant temperature Normal operation will resume once the engine tempera ture has risen to a suitable level Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated In this mode the transmission remains in third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to oper ate The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL may be illu minated Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam aging the transmission 238 STARTING AND OPERATING HN In the event of a momentary problem the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps Stop the vehicle
266. re of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information Check TPMS Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected an audible chime will be activated and the Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System text mes sage will display If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur with any of the following sce narios 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE Your vehicle may be equipped with a compact spare wheel and tire assembly 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not moni tor the tire
267. re value e For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a Service Tire Pres sure Monitoring System message and dashes in place of the pressure value Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it the TPMS will update automatically In addi tion the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op eration The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses MRXC4W4MA4 2546A C4W4MA4 Single United States Canada FUEL REQUIREMENTS 1 4L Engine compe puerro This engine is designed to meet all emis sion regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and per
268. reset the oil change indica tor system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163 NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure Trip Computer The Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster It features a driver interactive display displays informa tion such as trip information range fuel consumption average speed and travel time Trip Button The TRIP button located on the right steering column stalk can be used to display and to reset the previously described values e A short button press displays the different values Along button press resets the system and then starts a new trip New Trip To reset e Push and hold the TRIP button to reset the system manually e When the Trip distance reaches 99999 9 miles or kilometers or when the Travel time reaches 999 59 999 hours and 59 minutes the system is reset auto matically Disconnecting Reconnecting the battery resets the system NOTE If the reset operation occurs in the presence of the screens concerning Trip A or Trip B only the infor
269. ront of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle Flowing Rising Water WARNING Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flow ing water can wear away the road or path s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you Shallow Standing Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water consider the following Cautions and Warnings before doing so 242 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stopping distances Therefore after driving through stand ing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes e Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your pas sengers and others around you CAUTION e Always check the depth of th
270. rtion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal inju ries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you e A belt that is too loose will not protect you prop 4 erly In a sudden stop you could move too far likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision Continued THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 WARNING e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted belt may not protect you properly In a
271. ry engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer s engines have a full flow type dispos able oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPARO engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357 WARNING Maintenance Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPARO engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom mended e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid
272. s injury or death Continued 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued NOTE To prevent the key from being locked in the vehicle the doors will automatically unlock if the driver s door Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or handle is pushed when the key is in the ignition in a location accessible to children A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Power Door Locks If Equipped A power door lock switch is incorporated into the driver door handle Push or pull the handle to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate If the driver s door handle is pushed a red Driver s Power Door Lock Handle lock indicator will show on the driver s door handle indi cating locked when the door is closed the door will lock a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 Autoclose When enabled the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicles speed exceeds 15 mph 24 km h To change the setting proceed as follows 1 Briefly press the MENU button to enter the MENU screen 2 Press the UP AA or DOWN V button to highlight Autoclose Press the MENU button use the UP or DOWN V buttons to turn setting ON or OFF 3 Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu
273. seat in the center of the seating position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle you may wish to move it to its rear most position to make room for the child seat You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the seat belt path of the child restraint Do not twist the belt webbing in the seat belt path Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat 5 a N oo THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 To lock the seat belt pull down on the shoulder part of the seat belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor Then allow the webbing to retract back into the retractor As the webbing retracts you will hear a clicking sound This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor If it is locked you should not be able to pull out any web bing If the retractor is not locked repeat step 5 Finally pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat If the child r
274. service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration 350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN LS For states that require an Inspection and Mainte nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may
275. sidents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE HN Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 Canadian residents call 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major inv
276. sion people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM Front Seats Forward Rearward Adjustment move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched WARNING e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats near the floor injury or death e Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt s Recline Adjustment q The recline adjustment lever is located on the inboard side of the seat To recline the seatback lift up the recline lever lean back until the desired position has been reached and release the lever Adjusting Bar While sitting in the seat lift up on the bar and move the seat forward or rearward Release the bar once the desired position is reached Then using body pressure Recline Lever WARNING Do not ride with the seatback recl
277. sired direction If the A or V button is pressed longer the fast search starts and then stops when the button is released Stereophonic Broadcasters If the incoming signal is weak the reproduction is automatically switched from Stereo to Mono SiriusXM Satellite Radio If Equipped SiriusXM Satellite Radio With over 130 channels SiriusXM Satellite Radio brings you more of what you love Get 69 channels of 10076 commercial free music plus all of your favorite sports news talk and entertainment Hear every NFL game every NASCAR race college sports and more The big gest and most compelling names in talk with Howard Stern and Martha Stewart laugh out loud comedy with Jamie Foxx s The Foxxhole and Blue Collar Comedy plus kids programming world class news local traffic and weather All of this with crystal clear coast to coast coverage Everything worth listening to is now on Siri usXM A one year SiriusXM Satellite Radio subscription is included SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc and its subsidiaries SiriusXM Radio requires a subscription sold separately after trial subscription included with vehicle purchase Prices and programming are provided by SiriusXM and are subject to change Subscriptions governed by Terms amp Conditions available at sirius com service terms Siri usXM Radio U S service only available to those at least 18 years of age in the 48 contiguous United S
278. sition a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 7 CONTINUE to hold the CLOSED button until the top begins to cycle fully open then release the CLOSED button At the end of step 7 the top will automatically cycle to the fully open position and then close to the 1 4 open position This will confirm that the relearn procedure was success ful Auto Open Close will now be functional Trunk lid operation will be functional Remote Keyless Power Top Function will be functional NOTE DO NOT interrupt this activity If the power convertible top does not relearn repeat the procedure a second time Wind Stop The Wind Stop installs in the backseat area of the vehicle The Wind Stop will not interfere with power top opera tion Therefore it can remain installed when the top is up EE MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror The mirror can be adjusted up down left and right for various drivers The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressin
279. sitive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid if equipped or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ll POWER CONVERTIBLE TOP IF EQUIPPED 86 Heated Mirrors If Equipped Lowering The Power Top 86 SUN VISOIS o2 vu des bu ei tas 93 Raising The Power Top o ooooooo o 87 BM BLUE amp ME HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION Power Convertible Top Relearn Procedure 88 T POMPE ED rt A Wind Stop eee 89 OVEIVICW 3 3562 SG See aa E he E de 94 M MIRRORS ceo ERRRIERE UR E DPERE DS 89 PSE A ri m Inside Day Night Mirror o o a o 89 RV M NC PEE 101 Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 90 O Front Seats Forward Rearward Adjustment 102 B Power NGS cc oho o oo koko PILIS Gael 91 Recline Adjustment 00 102 Folding Mirrors sees 93 A ENE semen ata tanec 103 EZ Entry Feature 1 46 eR ER e 104 Memory Feat te cees segure paktur giin 104 Heated Seats If Equipped 105 Head Restraints os Serada dahaga ii 106 E T
280. sively By pressing them down longer the levels will change quickly Select the value 0 to set the right and left audio outputs at the same level Loudness Function If Equipped The Loudness function improves the volume of the sound while listening at low volumes increasing the bass and treble To activate deactivate this function select the Loudness setting in the AUDIO menu The condition of the function on or off is shown on the display for a few seconds by the wording Loudness On or Loudness Off A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 Preset User Classic Rock Jazz Functions If Equipped The built in equalizer can be activated deactivated When the equalizer function is off the audio settings can only be changed by adjusting the Bass and Treble settings whereas when the function is on the acoustic curves can be adjusted To deactivate the equalizer select the EQ Preset function in the audio menu To activate the equalizer use the AUDIO button or to select one of the adjustments e EQ User adjustment of 7 equalizer bands that can be changed by the user e Classic equalizer preset for optimal classic music sound e Rock equalizer preset for optimal rock and pop music sound e Jazz equalizer preset for optimal jazz music sound When one of the equalizer adjustments is activated the wording EQ lights up User EQ Settings Function
281. solution and can burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies for further information Continued 358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN WARNING Continued CAUTION e Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other e Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type vented e It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked positive and negative and are identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion e If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables be fore connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide s
282. sors o o o ooooo 125 M ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS Rear Park Assist Alerts 125 B CIGAR LIGHTER IF EQUIPPED 135 Failure Indicati0NS o ooooooooo DM CUPHOLDERS v REN ds 136 Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System 127 BM STORAGE cusco RR ESAE RR ba 137 Park Assist System Usage Precautions 127 Glove Compartment o o c oo o o ooo 137 ll POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED 130 M CARGO AREA FEATURES wes sede corsa ve 138 To Open ups ead nies Beale Sa EU 131 W REAR WINDOW FEATURES i e ees 139 TO Closes coded nice idee esce ed uos 131 Rear Window Defroster o o oo o 139 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE II POWER CONVERTIBLE TOP IF EQUIPPED On vehicles equipped with a power convertible top the power convertible top switch is located on the overhead console The switch contains two buttons The passenger side button is used to open the power top and the driver side button is used to close the power top ar 7 Power Convertible Top Switch NOTE e The power top buttons will operate when the ignition switch is turned to the ACC ON RUN position e The power top can be remotely operated with the key fob Refer to Opening Power Top Remote Function in Things To Know Before Starting for more infor mation Lowering The Power Top Auto Open Push the top open button approximately one second f
283. splay the vehicle speed MPH or km h To activate On or to deactivate Off the speed display feature proceed as follows 1 Briefly press the MENU button Press the UP Aor DOWN V button to highlight Speed Display Press the MENU button to enter the Speed Display MENU Press the UP Nor DOWN V button to select display deactivation Off MPH or km h Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or press and hold the MENU button approxi mately one second to go back to the main screen Autoclose With this function active the doors will automatically lock at when the vehicle s speed exceeds 15 mph 24 km h To change the setting proceed as follows 1 Briefly press the MENU button Press the UP Aor DOWN V button to highlight Autoclose Press the MENU button to enter Autoclose MENU Press the UP Aor DOWN V button for setting UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171 3 Briefly press the MENU button to go back to the menu screen or press and hold the MENU button approxi mately one second to go back to the main screen without storing the settings Units Set Units This function may be used to set the measurement unit in three submenus Distance Iemperature and Fuel Economy and Tire Pressure To set the required unit proceed as follows 1 Briefly press the MENU button Press the UP Aor DOWN button to highlight Units Press the MENU button to enter Units MENU
284. ss e al 072607741 1 Wiper Arm 2 Pivot Cap NOTE The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully up ward unless the pivot cap is raised first 2 Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper blade off of the liftgate glass 3 Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper blade holder MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365 4 1 Wiper Blade 2 Blade Pivot Pin 3 Wiper Arm 4 Wiper Blade Holder Wav 072607742 4 Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade holder at the end of the wiper arm and firmly press the wiper blade until it snaps into place 366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE INN 5 Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into place Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment and the fluid level should be checked at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with wind shield washer solvent not engine coolant antifreeze Refer to Engine Compartment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in t
285. ssure e Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is ad equate With the engine off and cold the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be be tween the bottom and top lines marked COLD FILL RANGE As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfac tory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month 374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high
286. ssure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold tire pressure on the placard Once the low tire pressure warning lire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light illuminates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitor ing Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours tire pressure of 30 psi 207 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi 186 kPa a tempera ture drop to 20 E 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi 159 kPa This tire pressure is suffi ciently low enough to turn on the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi 186 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be on In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s re
287. stacle when backing up eg during a parking maneuver Refer to the Park Assist System Usage Precautions for the limitations of this system and recommendations Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control and have an accident Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery Rear Park Assist is automatically activated when the transmission is placed into REVERSE As the distance from an obstacle behind the vehicle decreases the au dible alert becomes more frequent a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 Rear Park Assist Sensors The four Rear Park Assist sensors located in the rear fascia bumper monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect obstacles in the horizontal direction from approximately 12 in 30 cm up to 55 in 140 cm from the center of the rear fascia bumper and up to 24 in 60 cm from the corners of the rear fascia bumper depending on the location type and orientation of the obstacle If several obstacles are detected the Rear Park Assist system indicates the nearest obstacle The minimum height of a detectable obstacle corresponds to the maximum height of an obstacle that would clear the underside of the car during the parking maneuver Rear P
288. stance resulting in higher fuel consump tion Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Both underinflation and over inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering NOTE Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or rear edge of the driver s side door At least once a month Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket type pressure gauge Do not make a visual judge ment when determining proper inflation Tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated A STARTING AND OPERATING 271 e Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three
289. stem In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally Continued WARNING Continued high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage Riding the brakes may also reduce braking capacity in an emergency Brake Master Cylinder The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked when performing under hood services or immediately if the Brake Warning Light is on Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap If necessary add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear The brake fluid level should be checked when the pads are replaced However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed 376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Ia NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with a manual trans mission the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to both WARNING the brake system and the clutch release system The two e Use only manufacturer s recommended brake systems are separated in the reservoir and a leak in one fluid Refer to Fluids Lubrican
290. strument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear Bi Level e Air is directed through the panel and floor d outlets e Floor m Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demister outlets e Mix J Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demister outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing mois ture on the windshield e Defrost W Air is directed through the windshield and side window demister outlets Use this mode with maximum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix or Defrost even if the Air Conditioning A C button is not pressed This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary 5 A C Button Press this button to engage the Air Conditioning A light will illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is engaged UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 MAX A C For maximum cooling use the A C and recirculation modes at the same time ECONOMY MODE If economy mode is desired press the A C button to turn OFF the indicator light and the A C compressor Then move the temperature
291. t ing during the high load condition A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an automatic recirculation system When the system senses a heavy load or high heat conditions it may use Recir culation A C mode to provide additional comfort while in automatic mode Winter Operation When operating the system during the winter months make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of ice slush snow or other obstruc tions Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service ie vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air using the high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the air conditioning system is started again STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS B STARTING PROCEDURES 1 25 Re 223 Manual Transmission If Equipped 223 Automatic Transmission If Equipped 223 Normal Starting t res 223 Cold Weather Operation 224 Extended Park Starting 224 If Engine Fails To Start 225 After Starting x wade gone pas 225 O Turbocharger Cool Down 226 ll MANUAL TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED 226 Five Speed Manual Transmission
292. t BLINKS 3 Turn Right Turn Signal Switch ON Right Turn Light is ON SOLID Left Turn Light BLINKS 4 Turn Left Turn Signal Switch ON Left Turn Light is ON SOLID Right Turn Light BLINKS 5 Turn Right Turn Signal Switch ON Right Turn Light is ON SOLID Left Turn Light BLINKS 6 Turn Left Turn Signal Switch ON Left Turn Light is ON SOLID Right Turn Light is ON SOLID 7 Turn Left Turn Signal Switch OFF Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State Left Turn Light is OFF Right Turn Light is OFF 8 Turn ignition OFF System is now reset and the engine may be started 9 Turn Hazard Flashers OFF Manually 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II If a reset procedure step is not completed within 45 sec onds then the turn signal lights will turn off and the reset procedure must be performed again in order to be successful If A Deployment Occurs The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags any or all of the following may occur The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope
293. t of their rear facing child safety seat Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old Children should remain rearward facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat WARNING e Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an air bag A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rearward facing infant seat Only use a rearward facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear facing convertible child seat can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direc tion are for children who are over two years old or who 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING
294. t someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may to remove the tire result in personal injury dc I uM ON X the jack screw to the right Raise the vehicle only until CAUTION the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift facing outward The vehicle could be damaged if the provides maximum stability spare tire is mounted incorrectly 6 Remove the wheel bolts and pull the wheel off the WARNING hub For vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels To avoid possible personal injury handle the wheel the center caps must be removed to remove the wheel bolts For vehicles equipped with steel wheels the wheel covers must be removed to remove the wheel covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp bolts edges a WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 329 7 Install the spare wheel and wheel bolts with the cone shaped end of the bolts toward the wheel Lightly tighten the bolts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the bolts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left Finish tightening the wheel bolts Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until each bolt has been tightened twice For the
295. tarting voltage a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 359 Air Conditioner Maintenance WARNING Continued The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time WARNING Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Warranty Information Book located on the DVD for further warranty information R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a If Equipped Continued 360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Protection
296. tates D C and PR Service available in Canada see www siriuscanada ca a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 SiriusXM Satellite Radio Program Types Program Types can be selected by pressing the A or V buttons The Program Type will change to the next category and the radio will then tune to first station in that program type Pressing 4 or buttons will tune to only the stations in that program type Pressing the A or V buttons until All is displayed will allow normal tuning to all stations The Program Types available are All Pop Rock Electronic Dance Hip Hop R amp B Country Christian Jazz Standards Classical Latin World Sports Enter tainment Talk News NPR Comedy Family amp Health Religion Traffic Weather You can find the SiriusXM current terms and conditions at http www sirius com Re Subscribe To SiriusXM Satellite Radio New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with their radio Following expiration of the free services it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen in order to re subscribe Press the UP DOWN button to scroll through the Menu Functions and the Left Right button to change the selected Set up Menu function Write down the Electronic Serial Number ESN for your receiver To retrieve the Electronic Serial Number of SiriusXM Satellite Receiver Module tune to Channel 0
297. tem to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the vehicle s elec tronic systems Chrysler Group LLC 14FF500 126 AC AE Third Edition Rev 1 Printed in U S A
298. ter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 A weak battery in the transmitter The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios DOOR LOCKS The door locks can be manually locked or unlocked from inside the vehicle by using the door handle If the door handle is pushed a red lock indicator will show on the door handle indicating locked when the door is closed the door will lock THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 WARNING Continued For personal security and safety in the event of a collision lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK and re move the Key Fob from the ignition When leaving the vehicle always lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is Driver s Door Lock Handle dangerous for a number of reasons A child or WARNING others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking Do not leave children or animals inside parked 021835847 brake brake pedal or the shift lever vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause seriou
299. ter the Sealant Bottle 1 is empty Continue to operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver side 314 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN latch pillar recommended pressure Check the tire 3 Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose 6 from the pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge 3 If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi 1 8 Bar pressure within 15 minutes e The tire is too badly damaged Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further Call for assistance NOTE If the tire becomes over inflated press the Defla tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom mended inflation pressure before continuing If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at least 26 psi 1 8 Bar pressure within 15 minutes 1 Press the Power Button 4 to turn off the TIREFIT kit 2 Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the Sealant Bottle 1 and place the sticker on the instru ment panel valve stem reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the hose and place the TIREFIT kit in the vehicle storage location Quickly proceed to D Drive Ve hicle CAUTION The metal end fitting from Power Plug 8 may get hot after use so it should be handled carefully e Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose 6 can result in sealant con tacting your skin clothing and the vehicle s inte rior It can also resu
300. that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils Engine Oil Selection 1 4L Turbo Engine For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12991 CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355 Engine Oil Viscosity 1 4L Engine SAE Grade SAE 5W 30 engine oil recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion Engine Oil Viscosity 1 4L Turbo Engine SAE Grade SAE 5W 40 full synthetic engine oil is recommended for
301. that you use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take your focus off the road or your hands off the steering To use the media player you have to simply connect wheel Your primary responsibility is the safe op directly or by an extension lead your USB device to eration of your vehicle the car USB port After turning the ignition key to ON e Read and Follow Instructions before using your BLUE amp ME will start building your media library At system read and follow all instructions and safety the end of this operation you can surf the complete information provided in this Owner s Manual library and scroll its categories as required using the Failure to do so can result in serious injury or buttons on the steering wheel or voice commands death BLUE amp ME will then play your selection via the car sound system Continued a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 WARNING Continued Keep the Owner s Manual in the car when kept in the car the Owner s Manual will be a ready refer ence for you and other users unfamiliar with the system Please make certain that before using the system for the first time all persons have access to the Owner s Manual and read its instructions and safety information carefully SEATS Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle WARNING e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a colli
302. the vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle Once a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN This PIN is required for authorized dealer replacement of keys Duplication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer This procedure consists of program ming a blank key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one which has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer Sys tem serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE IF EQUIPPED This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate from distances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m m using a hand held Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmit ter The RKE transmitter does not need to be
303. the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces WARNING Continued Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in a collision CAUTION Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall clutch system performance Improper brake fluids may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of clutch function and the ability to shift the transmis sion 378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Manual Transmission If Equipped Lubricant Selection Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a point not more than 3 16 in 4 7 mm below the bottom of the hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Frequency Of Fluid Change Under normal operating conditions the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubri cant has become contaminated with water NOTE If contaminated with water the fluid should be changed immediately Automatic Transmission If E
304. the dial to the left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while rotating to the right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures 2 Blower Control Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the ventilation system in any mode The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the 0 OFF position There are four blower speeds 3 Recirculation Control Rotate this control to change the system between recir culation mode and outside air mode Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle Se lect the outside air position for maximum defogging Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost The A C can be deselected manually without dis turbing the mode control selection 4 Mode Control Rotate this control to change the system between Modes Panel Bi Level Floor Mix Defrost e Panel Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be ad justed to direct airflow A NOTE The center in
305. the display followed by the current status of the function e Off function deactivated Low function activated low sensitivity A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 e High function activated high sensitivity On Volume Limit This function makes it possible to activate deactivate the maximum volume limit when turning the radio on The display shows the function status e On volume limit on when the radio is turned on the volume level will be If the volume level is equal to or higher than the maximum value the radio will come on at the maximum volume If the volume level is between the minimum and maximum values the radio will come on at the same volume as before it was switched off If the volume level is equal to or lower than the minimum value the radio will come on at the minimum volume e On volume limit off The radio will come on at the same volume as before it was switched off The volume level can be between 0 and 40 Use the buttons 4 or gt gt to change the setting NOTE Using the Menu it is only possible to adjust the activation deactivation of the function and not the minimum or maximum volume value e If the battery charge is too low the volume cannot be adjusted between the minimum and the maximum level Radio Off Function This function makes it possible to set the radio switching off mode by choosing between two methods 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTR
306. the size designation of your tire The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall See the Tire Sizing Chart ex ample found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle s handling If you ever replace a wheel make sure that the wheel s specifications match those of the original wheels It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle 280 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING WARNING Continued e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components You could lose control and have a collision resulting
307. the webbing retract back into the retractor If it is locked the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor For additional information on ALR refer to the Automatic Locking Mode description un der Occupant Restraints Lap Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child Restraints in this Vehicle 022669375 e ALR Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor e S Top Tether Anchorage Symbol 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE II What is the weight limit child s weight weight of the child restraint for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint Can the rear facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat Yes Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is allowed if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact Can the head restraints be removed Yes Yes all may be moved Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR 1 Place the child
308. ting Sealant Mode Push in the Mode Select Knob 5 and 060410595 EFFET turn to this position to inject the TIRE E components FIT Sealant and to inflate the tire Use 1 Sealant Bottle 5 Mode Select Knob the Sealant Hose clear hose 6 when 2 Deflation Button 6 Sealant Hose Clear selecting this mode 3 Pressure Gauge 7 Air Pump Hose Black 4 Power Button 8 Power Plug located on bottom side of TIREFIT Kit Using The Power Button Push and release the Power Button 4 once to turn On the TIREFIT kit Push and release the Power Button 4 again to turn Off the TIREFIT O kit Using The Deflation Button V TIREFIT Usage Precautions Replace the TIREFIT Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant Hose 6 prior to the expiration date printed at the lower right hand corner on the bottle label to assure optimum operation of the system Refer to Sealing a Tire with TIREFIT section F Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement Press the Deflation Button 2 to reduce the air pressure in the tire if it becomes over inflated WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 309 0604018634 TIREFIT Expiration Date Location e The Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant Hose 6 are a one tire application use and need to be replaced after each use Always replace these components immediately at your original equipment vehicle dealer e When the TIREFIT sealant is in a liquid form clean water and a damp cloth will remove
309. ting the system and starting the engine System Reset Procedure After an impact causing airbag deployment the left and right turn signal lights located in the instrument panel cluster will both be blinking until the ignition is turned off In order to move your vehicle to the side of the road you must follow the system reset procedure 344 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HN Customer Action Customer Will See 1 Turn ignition OFF Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State 2 Turn ignition ON Left Turn Light is OFF Right Turn Light BLINKS 3 Turn Right Turn Signal Switch ON Right Turn Light is ON SOLID Left Turn Light BLINKS 4 Turn Left Turn Signal Switch ON 5 Turn Right Turn Signal Switch ON Left Turn Light is ON SOLID Right Turn Light BLINKS Right Turn Light is ON SOLID Left Turn Light BLINKS 6 Turn Left Turn Signal Switch ON Left Turn Light is ON SOLID Right Turn Light is ON SOLID 7 Turn Left Turn Signal Switch OFF Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State Left Turn Light is OFF Right Turn Light is OFF 8 Turn ignition OFF 9 Turn Hazard Flashers OFF Manually System is now reset and the engine may be started If a reset procedure step is not completed within 45 seconds then the turn signal lights will turn off and the reset procedure must be performed again in order to be suc
310. tion of the owners manual Premium TPM System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module A STARTING AND OPERATING 289 The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings 1 The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires In addition the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure tire highlighted in a different color 10 37 am 05 31 2012 low pressure 055874193 Low Tire Indicator Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with low pressure to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need 290 STARTING A
311. tion will be heard A CD which cannot be read will not be ejected until these functions are over At the end with the CD mode activated the display will show the wording CD Disc error for a few seconds and then the CD will be ejected A UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 Display Information When the CD player is operating information will ap pear on the display with the following meaning e Track 5 indicates the CD track number e 03 42 indicates the time elapsed since the start of the track if the relevant Menu function is activated Track Selection Briefly press the button to play the previous CD track and the button to play the next track The tracks are selected cyclically the first track is selected after the last track and vice versa If the track has been played for more than 3 seconds pressing the button starts the track again from the beginning In this case if you want to play the previous track press the 4 button twice consecu tively Track Fast Forward Rewind Keep the button pressed down to fast forward the selected track and keep the button pressed down to fast rewind the track The fast forward rewind will stop once the button is released Pause Function To pause the CD player press the A button The word ing CD Pause appears on the display To resume listening to the track press the A button again CD MP3 Player Introduction This chapter describes the ope
312. tions and are commonly referred to as ESC Four Wheel Anti Lock Brake System ABS The Four Wheel ABS is designed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking con ditions The system operates with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock up and to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces The system s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to provide regulated hydraulic pressure The pump motor makes a low humming noise during operation which is normal The ABS includes an amber ABS Warning Light When the light is illuminated the ABS is not functioning The system reverts to standard non anti lock brakes Turning the ignition Off and On again may reset the ABS if the fault detected was only momentary WARNING e Pumping the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop The Anti Lock Brake System ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded Continued 250 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING Continued The ABS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or
313. to an unlocked vehicle Never leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location acces sible to children Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In a collision there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passen gers are properly secured Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result 034164715 Power Sunroof Switch a UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 To Open Press and hold the power sunroof switch rearward for approximately one second and the sunroof will stop at the vented position Press the switch a second time and hold for approximately one second and release the sunroof will open fully then stop automatically This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof To Close With the sunroof in the full open position pull the power sunroof button and hold it for approximately one second the sunroof will return to the vented position Pull the switch a second time and hold for approximately one second to completely close the sunroof
314. to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty ing assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as pos sible If the Steering icon is flashing it indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to an authorized dealer for service It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance 244 STARTING AND OPERATING HN If the Steering icon is displayed and the POWER STEER ING SYSTEM OVER TEMP message is displayed on the EVIC screen they indicate that extreme steering maneu vers may have occurred which caused an over tempera ture condition in the power steering system Once driv ing conditions are safe pull over and let the vehicle idle for a few moments until the icon and message turn off Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information EVIC in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further informa tion If the Steering icon is displayed and the SERVICE POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF message is displayed the EVIC screen they indicate the vehicle needs to be taken to an authorized dealer for service Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE Even if the power steering assistance is no longer operational it is still possible to steer the vehicle Under these conditions there will be a s
315. toque dope ads 281 Changing 2 45 95 eats du bas dp 319 Compact Spare llle 275 General Information llle 269 High Speedi srete acne aor ee cd 272 Inflation Pressures llle 270 Life of reS iaa ai aa ata 278 Load Capacity iio scar Fes eU nea 264 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 283 Pressure Warning Light 149 Quality Grading ver RR Ego 417 Radial is a a ia E Ed dine EIE RSS MORS 272 Replacemefit i224 ia io ced mia RE ee 279 Rotation 2ikewaekm da RARE RENT 282 SAC uses A ud SD e sce Doe ee os 257 SIZES 42234 g db ee EXCRG a E 259 SNOW TES 4 32452 1 3 de enr RR an 69 0x RO ed 273 Spinning c s awe e end 277 Tread Wear Indicators llle 277 Tire Safety Information oooooooomoooo oo 257 To Open Hode ianea a papane EE ee 109 TOWING cipal ss 299 Disabled Vehicle o ooo 340 Recreational o o o ooooooooo o o 300 Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome 300 A INDEX 435 Tachos oy Ren ione sn Rd emo CRI d Reip E ae 240 Traction Control eseria ni TRE a 251 Trailer TOWING acm eR Esa 299 Transaxle Automatic 42242234 99 3 aia PS ee ee 11 TRANSMISSION sia Boa wna TL TT IRL 378 Automate iaa ba ene 8 88 248 229 Fluid uu 645 6 based a aa ida 378 Manual 2 dim 68 oe A A ac AR qe 226 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 18 Transporting Pets llle 77 Tread Wear Indicators 1 0 0 0000 c
316. train the driver and front passenger The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the air bag In this way the air bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Inflator Unit The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag unit is located in the instrument panel trim beneath the steering column When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag The trim cover separates and folds out of the way allowing the air bag to inflate to the full size The air bag fully inflates in about 15 to 20 milliseconds Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag SAB Inflator Units The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB are designed to activate only in certain side collisions The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side air bags to inflate based on the severity and type of collision Based on the severity and type of collision the side air bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered releasing a large quantity of non toxic gas The inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 between the occupant and the door The SAB fully inflates in about 10 milliseconds The side air bag moves at a very high speed and with such a
317. ts and Genuine system will not affect the other system The manual Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further transmission clutch release system should not require information Using the wrong type of brake fluid fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle If the can severely damage your brake system and or brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake system does impair its performance The proper type of brake not indicate any leaks or other problems it may be a fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system See original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder your local authorized dealer for service reservoir Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information Continued a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377 WARNING Continued To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro longed braking resulting in sudden brake failure This could result in a collision Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing
318. two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position These anchorages are used to install LATCH equipped child seats without using the vehicle s seat belts Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages In these seating positions the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint Please see the following table for more information THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In e Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per This Vehicle seating position e 4 Top Tether Anchorage Symbol EN 022669374 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In What is the weight limit child s weight weight of the child restraint for using the LATCH an chorage system to attach the child restraint 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Use the LATCH anchorage system until the com bined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs 29 5 kg Do not use the seat belt when you use the Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a rear facing or forward facing child restraint No LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear facing or forward facing child restraint
319. tyle Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 16 Automatic Gearbox Fault 17 Oil Pressure Warning Light This light will illuminate when there is an automatic transmission fault RET this light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood 18 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL C an onboard diagnostic system called OBDII that monitors engine and automatic transmission con trol systems The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON RUN position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF LOCK to ON RUN have the condition checked promptly The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the MIL after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In 152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL most situations t
320. type M S Snow Traction device must be of proper size for the tire as recommended by the traction device manufacturer Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle e Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave ment between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling You could lose control and have a collision Continued 282 STARTING AND OPERATING HN CAUTION Continued Observe the traction device manufacturer s instruc tions on the method of installation operating speed and conditions for use Always use the suggested operating speed of the device manufac turer s if it is less than 30 mph 48 km h Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed
321. ubstantial increase in steering effort especially at low speeds and during parking maneuvers e If the condition persists see your authorized dealer for service PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied Also be certain to leave manual transmission in REVERSE or first gear The parking brake lever is located in the center console To apply the parking brake pull the lever up as firmly as possible To release the parking brake pull the lever up slightly press the center button then lower the lever completely Parking Brake When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the MAR ACC ON RUN position the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate STARTING AND OPERATING 245 When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle WARNING e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Continued 246 STARTING AND OPERATING HN WARNING Continued CAUTION Do not leave the Key Fo
322. ules on the following page for the required maintenance intervals At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System Change oil and filter Rotate the tires Rotate at the first sign of irregu lar wear even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required Inspect brake pads rotors and hoses Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses Check and adjust hand brake Inspect exhaust system Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off road conditions 406 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES INN Maintenance Chart Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals place if necessary Inspect the brake linings Re place as necessary i i o o o o o o Mileage or time passed e elg g 3 2 2 2 S 3 3 3 e 3 whichever comes first c S eae aj a a a a 5 c cS e e e e e e e e e N e lo A e i5 N eo o Or Years 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Or Kilometers o o ee e 8 S 3 3 S 3 3 S 3 z 328222258 5 5 5 8 SIF e em S S E mS HE ISI NI Additional Inspections Inspect the CV joints X X X X X Inspect front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals and re X X X X X X a MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 407 Mileage or time
323. unds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish scratch metal and painted surfaces Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of paint and decals Special Care e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month e It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and open 382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN e e If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel And Wheel Trim Care e All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and wat
324. ur vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle If your vehicle has this option refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter T or S preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M T S Temporary Spare Tire Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip ment tire should be repaired or replaced and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity 276 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time WARNING Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only With these spares do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spares have limited tread life When th
325. ure Each air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side impact head injuries The SABIC deploy downward covering both windows on the impact side R 022635856 Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Label Location NOTE Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In The system includes side impact sensors that are cali brated to deploy the Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB WARNING and SABIC during impacts that require air bag occupant e Your vehicle is equipped with left and right protection Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system Occupants including children who are up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be seriously injured or killed Occupants especially chil dren should not lean on or sleep against the door side windows or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags inflate even if they are in an infant or child restraint The area where the SABIC is located should remain free from any obstructions e Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side air bags the performance could be adversely affected and or obj
326. use the recirculation mode e If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the seat belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding seat belt or retractor condition replace the seat belt A
327. utions NOTE e Ensure that the outer surface and the underside of the rear bumper is clean and clear of snow ice mud dirt or other obstruction to keep the Rear Park Assist system operating properly Jackhammers large trucks and other vibrations could affect the performance of Rear Park Assist Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors regularly taking care not to scratch or damage them The sensors must not be covered with ice snow slush mud dirt or debris Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly The Rear Park Assist system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia bumper or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia bumper Objects such as bicycle carriers etc must not be placed within 12 in 30 cm from the rear fascia bumper while driving the vehicle Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem causing a failure indication to be displayed in the instrument cluster 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IM CAUTION e Rear Park Assist is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle including small obstacles Parking curbs might be temporarily de tected or not detected at all Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity The vehicle must be driven slowly when using Rear Park Assist in order to be able to stop in time when
328. vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors The EVIC will also display a Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System message for a minimum of five seconds when a system fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is detected In this case the Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System message is then fol lowed with a graphic display with pressure values still shown This indicates that the pressure values are still being received from the TPM sensors but they may not be located in the correct vehicle position The system still needs to be serviced as long as the Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System message is displayed NOTE The TPMS will not monitor the pressure in a replace ment tire installed without a tire pressure sensor If you install a replacement tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will remain on and a chime will sound In addition the graphic in the EVIC will still display a pressure value highlighted in a different color e After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring 292 STARTING AND OPERATING HN Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a Service TPM System message and then display dashes in place of the pressu
329. very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369 Cooling System Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 WARNING months before the onset of freezing weather where When working near the radiator cooling fan dis applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty er connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition Usty in appearance the system should be drained switch to the OFF position The fan is temperature flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant anti controlled and can start at any time the ignition freeze Check the front of the A C condenser for any switch is in the ON position accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently e You or others can be badly burned by hot engine spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If face of the condenser you see or hear steam coming from under the hood Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains visible sediment have an authorized dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant antifreeze conforming to MS 12106 370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper CAUTION maintenance intervals Mixin
330. when the turn has been completed and the steering wheel is returned to a straight position UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off Follow Me Home Headlight Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for a preset period of time Activation Remove the key or turn the ignition to the OFF LOCK position and pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel within two minutes Each time the lever is pulled the activation of the lights will be extended by 30 seconds The activation of the lights can be extended to a maximum of 210 seconds 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE IN Deactivation Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel and hold it for more than two seconds Interior Lights The interior light switches are located in the overhead console The interior lights can be set to three different positions Off Left Position Center Position On Right Position Using the switch on the left overhead press the switch to the right from its center position and the lights are always on Press the switch to the left from its center position and the lights are always off Leave the switch in the center position and the lights are turned on and off when the doors are opened
331. while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap Refer to Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage for directions to attach a tether anchor a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 6 Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 mm in any direction Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the belt path opening of the child restraint you may have trouble tightening the seat belt If this happens discon nect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt up to three full turns to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out away from the child restraint Repeat steps 4 to 6 above to complete the installation of the child restraint If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the buckle disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around one half turn and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still cannot make the child restraint installation tight try a different s
332. will give you an incorrect reading Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the range markings on the dipstick The safe range is indicated by a crosshatch zone Adding 1 qt 1L of oil when the reading is at the low end of the indicated range will result in the oil level at the full end of the indicator range CAUTION Do not overfill the engine with oil Overfilling the engine with oil will cause oil aeration which can lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil temperature This loss of oil pressure and increased oil temperature could damage your engine Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for further informa tion NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change in tervals exceed 10 000 miles 16 000 km or twelve months whichever occurs first 354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Engine Oil Selection 1 4L Engine American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil For best performance and maximum protection under all Hdenttication SyniBol types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 This symbol means
333. y corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact a MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381 CAUTION Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will e e e Insects tree sap and tar Salt in the air near seacoast localities Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing e e e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPARO Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use MOPARO Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPARO Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint Avoid using abrasive compo
334. y spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only Temporary high pressure com pact spare tires have the letter T or S molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT A STARTING AND OPERATING 259 Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T or Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent 76 Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in 260 STARTING AND OPERATING HN EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditio
335. ycol based engine coolant an tifreeze is not recommended Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant OAT coolant conforming to MS 12106 that allows extended maintenance intervals This engine cool ant antifreeze can be used up to ten years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km before replacement To prevent reduc ing this extended maintenance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant OAT coolant conform ing to MS 12106 throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Organic Additive Technology OAT engine coolant antifreeze that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan dard MS 12106 When adding engine coolant antifreeze We recommend using MOPARO Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula OAT Organic Additive Technology that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12106 e Mix a minimum solution of 50 OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan dard MS 12106 and distilled water Use higher concen trations not to exceed 7076 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant 372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE HN antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it
336. ylinder oooooooooooooooooo 375 Parking 4 2229 re b ass 244 Warning Light iua Rc Rees 153 Brake Transmission Interlock 231 Bulb Replacement ooooooooooo o oo oo 395 Bulbs Light ere Remo a aa GE Aa 82 Capacities Antifreeze Engine Coolant 399 Capacities Fluid su aia Re RR ea 399 Caps Filler Euel sn o eet ane du PES abe 298 Oil Engine cect eacad mia hiace RU E RE G4 Oe 355 Carbon Monoxide Warning oooooooooo 78 Cargo Area Features ooooooooooooo oo 138 Cat Washes iiis sea e seni Ro ao 381 CD Compact Disc Player oooooo o o 177 Cellular Phone 2 0 0 0 0 0000 206 Chains Tite ron args oa anh ae Be aa A eS 281 Change Oil Indicator 00 0000 404 Changing A Flat Tire ooooooooooooo o 319 Chart Tire Sizing sss ce ede ne 259 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 151 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 78 Cheeks Safety 1 acp ais sate eid b e ic ho 78 424 INDEX IN Child Restralfib uu aeu gd be cR e dete Een s 56 Child Restraints Child Seat Installation 73 Install A LATCH compatible Child Restraint 68 Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Bela eso eB DuC EN ess PEE 71 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children 64 Clean Air Gasoline 0 0 00000 294 Cleaning Wheels a ERG ee E Eds 382 Windshield Wiper Blades 363 Cli
337. you are having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder AII work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealer have the a F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 413 facilities factory trained technicians special to
338. you remove slack in the strap Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting a THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 Transporting Pets Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or could injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recom mended viscosity and quality grades refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle CAUTION Never use Non Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In NOTE A new engine may c

2014 FIAT 500/500c Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents